MF418, MF419 Service Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 292

Revision 3.

MF419/MF418 series
Service Manual
Introduction

Introduction
Important Notices

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does
not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the
need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
edition of this manual.

The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2015

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation


Check. Remove the claw.

1x

Check visually. Insert the claw.

1x

Check a sound. Push the part.


Introduction

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation


Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.

1x

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

1x

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.


cable guide or wire saddle.
1x

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.


guide or wire saddle.
1x

Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.

1x 1x

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

1x 1x

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:


1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
Contents

Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser Safety........................................................................................................................................ 2
How to Handle the Laser Scanner Unit............................................................................................... 2
Toner Safety........................................................................................................................................2
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................2
Handling Adhered Toner........................................................................................................................2
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery............................................................................................. 3
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................................................ 3

1. Product Overview.............................................................................................4
Product Lineups.................................................................................................................................. 5
Host machine........................................................................................................................................5
Options................................................................................................................................................ 6
Product Features.................................................................................................................................8
Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 9
Product Specifications........................................................................................................................... 9
ADF Specifications..............................................................................................................................10
Wireless LAN Specifications................................................................................................................ 10
Specification of SEND......................................................................................................................... 11
FAX specification................................................................................................................................ 11
Print speed......................................................................................................................................... 12
Paper type.......................................................................................................................................... 12
Paper size.......................................................................................................................................... 12
Parts Name....................................................................................................................................... 14
External View......................................................................................................................................14
Cross Sectional View...........................................................................................................................15
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................16

2. Technical Explanation (Device).................................................................... 18


Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 19
Configuration Function.........................................................................................................................19
Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................ 20
Basic Operational Sequence................................................................................................................20
Document Exposure / Delivery System.............................................................................................21
Document Exposure System................................................................................................................21
Document Feeder System................................................................................................................... 22
Controller System..............................................................................................................................25
Outline............................................................................................................................................... 25
Controls..............................................................................................................................................25
Low-voltage Power Supply...................................................................................................................27
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 30
Outline............................................................................................................................................... 30
Optical Unit Failure Detection...............................................................................................................30
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 31

i
Contents

Outline............................................................................................................................................... 31
Image Formation Process....................................................................................................................31
High-voltage Power Supply..................................................................................................................34
Fixing System....................................................................................................................................36
Outline............................................................................................................................................... 36
Controls..............................................................................................................................................36
Pickup / Feed System....................................................................................................................... 40
Outline............................................................................................................................................... 40
Drive Configuration..............................................................................................................................40
Jam Detection.....................................................................................................................................41

3. Technical Explanation (System)................................................................... 44


Overview of System Management.................................................................................................... 45
Version Upgrade............................................................................................................................... 46
Function Overview.............................................................................................................................. 46
Version Upgrade Using UST................................................................................................................ 46
Version Upgrade via Internet................................................................................................................50
Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)........................................................................... 53
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 53
Import/Export Procedure from [Settings/Registration] of Remote UI........................................................ 55
Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information......................................................59
List of Items Which Can Be Imported....................................................................................................61
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)............................................................ 84
Overview of System............................................................................................................................ 84
Service cautions..................................................................................................................................85
Setting Procedure............................................................................................................................... 85
Maintenace.........................................................................................................................................86

4. Periodical Service.......................................................................................... 88
Periodically Replaced Parts.............................................................................................................. 89
Consumable Parts.............................................................................................................................90
Periodical Service..............................................................................................................................91
Cleaning............................................................................................................................................ 92

5. Disassembly/Assembly................................................................................. 93
External Cover...................................................................................................................................94
Main Unit........................................................................................................................................... 95
Electrical Components Layout Drawing............................................................................................ 96
Sensor............................................................................................................................................... 96
Motor/Fan...........................................................................................................................................97
Other..................................................................................................................................................98
PCB................................................................................................................................................... 99
Connector Layout Drawing..............................................................................................................100
External Cover.................................................................................................................................106
Removing the Left Cover Unit............................................................................................................ 106
Removing the Left Rear Cover........................................................................................................... 107
Removing the Right Cover Unit.......................................................................................................... 108
Removing the Front Cover Unit.......................................................................................................... 110

ii
Contents

Removing the Rear Cover Unit...........................................................................................................111


Removing the Upper Cover................................................................................................................112
Document Exposure / Delivery System...........................................................................................114
Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit................................................................................................114
Removing the ADF Roller Unit............................................................................................................115
Removing the ADF Pickup Roller....................................................................................................... 116
Removing the ADF Separation Roller................................................................................................. 116
Removing the ADF Separation Pad.................................................................................................... 117
Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit..................................................................................................118
Removing the ADF Pickup Motor Unit.................................................................................................119
Removing the ADF Delivery Solenoid Unit.......................................................................................... 120
Removing the Reader Unit Upper Cover............................................................................................. 120
Removing the CIS Unit...................................................................................................................... 121
Controller System............................................................................................................................123
Removing the Controller Cover.......................................................................................................... 123
Removing the Wireless LAN PCB ......................................................................................................123
Removing the Main Controller PCB.................................................................................................... 123
Removing the NCU PCB (MF419x/ MF419dw).................................................................................... 124
Removing the OFF Hook PCB (MF419x/ MF419dw)............................................................................ 125
Removing the Controller Box..............................................................................................................125
Removing the Engine Controller Unit ................................................................................................. 127
Removing the Control Panel...............................................................................................................129
Removing the Control Panel PCB.......................................................................................................130
Removing the Main Motor ................................................................................................................. 131
Removing the Main Fan.....................................................................................................................132
Removing the Main Drive Unit ........................................................................................................... 132
Removing the Duplex Drive Unit.........................................................................................................134
Removing the Duplex Reverse Solenoid............................................................................................. 136
Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid.............................................................................................136
Laser Scanner System.................................................................................................................... 137
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 137
Image Forming System................................................................................................................... 138
Removing the Transfer Roller.............................................................................................................138
Removing the Registration Unit.......................................................................................................... 138
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................140
Removing the Fixing Assembly.......................................................................................................... 140
Pickup / Feed System..................................................................................................................... 142
Removing the Duplex Feed Unit......................................................................................................... 142
Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller................................................................................................. 142
Removing the Cassette Separation Pad..............................................................................................143
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.................................................................................. 143
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad............................................................................... 144

6. Adjustment................................................................................................... 145
Overview......................................................................................................................................... 146
Actions after Replacement Parts.....................................................................................................147
Document Exposure / Delivery System............................................................................................... 147
Controller System..............................................................................................................................159

iii
Contents

7. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................161
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 162
Test Pages....................................................................................................................................... 162
Trouble Shooting Items................................................................................................................... 163
Special Mode.................................................................................................................................... 163
Trailing edge image soiling.................................................................................................................164
Repetitive Image Defects Ruler.......................................................................................................... 164
Nip-width Specifications.....................................................................................................................164
Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................166
Function Overview.............................................................................................................................166
Conditions for collecting logs..............................................................................................................166
Collection procedure..........................................................................................................................166

8. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 168
Overview......................................................................................................................................... 169
Jam Code......................................................................................................................................... 169
Error codes......................................................................................................................................170
Jam code.........................................................................................................................................172
Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 174

9. Service Mode................................................................................................ 175


Overview......................................................................................................................................... 176
Service Mode Menu...........................................................................................................................176
Backing up Service Mode.................................................................................................................. 176
Screen flow of Service mode..............................................................................................................177
Remote UI Service Mode................................................................................................................... 177
COPIER...........................................................................................................................................180
DISPLAY.......................................................................................................................................... 180
ADJUST........................................................................................................................................... 182
FUNCTION....................................................................................................................................... 194
OPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 206
COUNTER........................................................................................................................................216
FEEDER..........................................................................................................................................221
ADJUST........................................................................................................................................... 221
FUNCTION....................................................................................................................................... 222
FAX................................................................................................................................................. 224
List of SSSW.....................................................................................................................................224
List of MENU.....................................................................................................................................225
List of NUM.......................................................................................................................................225
Setting of NCU Parameters................................................................................................................226
TESTMODE.................................................................................................................................... 230
PRINT.............................................................................................................................................. 230
FAX................................................................................................................................................. 232
MODEM........................................................................................................................................... 232
FACULTY......................................................................................................................................... 234

iv
Contents

10. Installation.................................................................................................. 236


Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy Card Reader Attachment-G1.............................................................237
Points to Note at Installation...............................................................................................................237
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 237
Turning OFF the power of thehost machine.........................................................................................237
Installation Outline Drawing................................................................................................................238
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 238
Setting after Installation..................................................................................................................... 251
Copy Control Interface Kit-C1......................................................................................................... 252
Points to Note at Installation...............................................................................................................252
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 252
Turning OFF the power of thehost machine.........................................................................................252
Installation Outline Drawing................................................................................................................252
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 252
MiCARD Attachment Kit-A2............................................................................................................ 260
Points to Note at Installation...............................................................................................................260
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 260
Turning OFF the power of thehost machine.........................................................................................261
Installation Outline Drawing................................................................................................................261
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 261

APPENDICES....................................................................................................276
Service Tools...................................................................................................................................277
Special Tools.................................................................................................................................... 277
Solvents and Oils.............................................................................................................................. 277
General Timing Chart...................................................................................................................... 278
General Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................279
Backup Data....................................................................................................................................280
Soft Counter Specifications............................................................................................................. 282

v
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety.......................................... 2
How to Handle the Laser Scanner Unit
...........................................................2
Toner Safety..........................................2
Notes When Handling a Lithium
Battery............................................... 3
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly..........3
Safety Precautions

Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
Therefore this machine is classified in Class 1 laser products that are regarded as safe during normal use according to
International Standard IEC60825-1.

How to Handle the Laser Scanner Unit


This machine is classified in Class 1 laser products.
However, inside the scanner unit, there is source of Class 3B laser beam and the laser beam is hazardous when entered into an
eye. So, be sure not to disassemble the laser scanner unit. No adjustment can be made to the laser scanner unit in this machine
in the field.
The label show in the following figure is attached on the laser scanner unit.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).

Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.


Innerhalb der Scannereinheit befindet sich jedoch die Laserstrahlquelle der Klasse 3B und es ist gefährlich, wenn dieser Strahl
in die Augen gerät. Die Laserscannereinheit darf unter keinen Umständen entfernt werden. Es dürfen in diesem Umfeld der
Maschine keine Justagen an der Laserscannereinheit vorgenommen werden.
Das Etikett in folgendem Bild ist auf der Laserscannereinheit angebrachtt.

Toner Safety

About Toner
Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments.

CAUTION:
Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion.

Handling Adhered Toner


• Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water.

2
Safety Precautions

• Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gelated to soak into fibers permanently.
• Toner particles are reactive with vinyl polymers. Avoid contacting these materials.

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery


Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

CAUTION:
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).

CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.

Notes on Assembly/Disassembly
Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.

CAUTION:
Double pole/neutral fusing

ACHTUNG

Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung

3
1 Product Overview
Product Lineups.................................... 5
Product Features...................................8
Specifications........................................ 9
Parts Name......................................... 14
1. Product Overview

Product Lineups

Host machine
Function MF419x/MF419dw MF418x
External

Copy Yes Yes


Print Yes Yes
Fax Yes -
Scan to USB Yes Yes
SEND Yes Yes
Remote UI Yes Yes
DADF Yes Yes
2-sided printing Yes Yes
(only paper of 60 to 128 g/m2)
Secured Print Yes Yes
MEAP - -
Network Yes Yes
Wireless LAN Yes Yes
Direct mode Yes Yes
NFC - -

5
1. Product Overview

Options

[6] [5]

[2]

[1]

[3]
[4]

No. Name Description Remarks


[1] Cassette Feeding Unit-U1 Approx. 500 Sheets (Plain paper 60 to -
89 g/m2)
[2] Canon TELEPHONE 6 KIT Long cord Cool White Addition of phone MF419x EUR/ MF419dw TWN/
MF418x EUR
[3] Copy Card Reader-F1 • Copy Card Reader Attachment- Other than KOR
G1 is required
• Cannot be installed with the Mi-
CARD Attachment Kit-A2
[4] MiCARD Attachment Kit-A2 A base for installing the MiCARD Other than KOR
• Cannot be installed with the
Copy Card Reader-F1
[5] Copy Control Interface Kit-C1 Connector for connecting the coin MF419x EUR, AUS/ MF419dw
vendor (CC-VI) US/ MF418x EUR
• Cannot be installed with the
Copy Card Reader Attachment-
G1

6
1. Product Overview

No. Name Description Remarks


[6] Copy Card Reader Attachment-G1 A base for installing the Copy Card Other than KOR
Reader
• It is required when installing the
Copy Card Reader-F1
• Cannot be installed with the
Copy Control Interface Kit-C1

7
1. Product Overview

Product Features

465.0 mm

450.0 mm

Improved Control Panel operability


A 3.5-inch color Touch Panel is installed. Support for touch and flick has realized the operability like a smartphone.

Support for direct mode


Direct communication between the host machine and smartphone, tablet, PC, etc. has been realized.

Faster printing from ADF


The speed of printing from the ADF has been increased from 28 ppm to 33 ppm for A4 paper.

8
1. Product Overview

Specifications

Product Specifications
Item Specifications/Function
Copyboard type Fixed Copyboard
Machine installation method Desktop (DADF equipped as standard)
Light source LED (RGB)
Photosensitive medium OPC Drum (24mm dia.)
Image reading method CIS (color)
Exposure method Laser beam exposure
Charging method Roller charging
Developing method Toner projection development (dry one-component magnetic toner)
Transfer method Roller transfer method
Separation method Curvature separation
Pickup Cassette: Pad separation method
Multi-purpose Tray: Pad separation method
Drum cleaning method Cleaning by rubber blade
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Toner level detection function Yes
Toner type One-component magnetic toner
Toner supplying method Replacement of all-in-one cartridge (drum + toner)
Toner saving mode Yes
Document type Copyboard Glass: Plain paper, heavy paper, photo, small document (such as a name card),
special paper (such as tracing paper and OHP film), book (up to 20 mm in width)
Feeder: Plain paper (one sheet of document, or multiple sheets of document of the same size,
width and weight)
Max. size of document that can be read 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm
Warm-up time*1 16 sec. or less
(Duration from power-on to standby)
Reading resolution <Text/Photo> : 300 dpi x 600 dpi (default)
<Text>, <Photo>, <Text/Photo (high image quality)>: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Print resolution 600 x 600 dpi
First copy time Copyboard Glass: 8 sec. or less (A4/LTR)
Feeder: 10 sec. or less
First print time 6.3 sec. or less (A4/LTR)
Print speed 33 sheets/min (A4), 35 sheets/min (LTR)
Paper type Cassette Plain paper, Recycled paper, Color paper, Heavy paper (90 to 128 g/m2)
Multi-Purpose Tray Plain paper, Recycled paper, Color paper, Heavy paper (90 to 163 g/m2), Label paper, Envelope
Paper size Cassette A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, M-OFFICIO, G-LTR, G-LGL, FLS,
A-FLS, I-LGL, Custom (width: 105.0 to 216.0 mm, length: 148.0 to 356.0 mm)
Multi-purpose Tray A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, M-OFFICIO, G-LTR, G-LGL, FLS,
A-FLS, I-LGL, 76.2 × 127.0 mm (3"×5"), Envelope (No.10 (COM10), Monarch, C5, DL), Custom
(width: 76.2 to 216.0 mm, length: 127.0 to 356.0 mm)
Cassette paper capacity Approx. 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi-purpose Tray pickup capacity Approx. 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Delivery Tray capacity Approx. 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Continuous reproduction 1 to 999 sheets
Auto 2-sided printing Yes (auto 2-sided printing is available only for LTR, A4 and LGL that weighs between 60 g to
128 g/m2)
Memory capacity 1 GB
Sleep mode Yes
Range of use environment tempera- 10 to 30 deg C
ture
Environment humidity range 20 to 80% (Relative humidity; without dew condensation)

9
1. Product Overview

Item Specifications/Function
Operation noise LwAd (declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB))
(Measured based on ISO7779, De- At standby: No noise
clared noise emission value based on At printing: 6.7 B or less (1-sided)
ISO9296) At printing: 6.7 B or less (2-sided)

LpAm (mean A-weighted emission sound-pressure level (bystander position))


At standby: No noise
At printing : Approx. 53 dB (1-sided)
At printing : Approx. 52 dB (2-sided)
Rated power supply 100V 50/60 Hz, 120V 60Hz, 120-127V 60Hz, 220-240V 50/60Hz
Power con- Maximum 930 W or less
sumption At standby Average of approx. 10 W
(Reference
During sleep mode Average of approx. 1.2 W (USB connection)
value)
Average of approx. 1.3 W (wired LAN connection)
Average of approx. 2.1 W (wireless LAN connection)
At turn-OFF of the 0.1 W or less
main power switch
Dimensions (W x D x H) 450 × 472 × 465 mm (without options)
Weight*2 Approx. 21.4 kg
Interface 1000BASE-T
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Hi-Speed USB
USB
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n (infrastructure mode)
Network Yes
SEND Yes

*1: It may vary depending on the usage conditions and environment of this machine.
*2: Including the Toner Cartridge

ADF Specifications
Item Specification/Function
Position to set a document Center reference
Document processing mode 1-sided document -> 1-sided copy/2-sided copy
2-sided document -> 1-sided copy/2-sided copy
Document reading method Stream reading
Basis weight of document Reading of 1-sided document: 50 g to 105 g
Reading of 2-sided document: 64 g to 105 g
Document stack capacity A4/LTR: 50 sheets (80 g/m2), LGL: 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Document reading speed A4: 300 × 300 dpi
• Color: 9.3 sheets/min
• Gray scale: 28 sheets/min
Stacking of mixed-size paper Yes (Paper of AB configuration and inch configuration cannot be
mixed)
Function to automatically detect document density None
Function to detect document size None
Stamp function None
Use environment Depends on the host machine

Wireless LAN Specifications


Item Specification/Function
Standard IEEE 802.11g / IEEE 802.11b / IEEE 802.11n
Transmission system DS-SS system / OFDM system

10
1. Product Overview

Item Specification/Function
Frequency range 2412 to 2472 MHz
Communication mode Infrastructure mode / Access point mode
Security WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Setting method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

Specification of SEND
Item Specification/Function
File server transmission E-Mail transmission I-Fax
Communication proto- SMB (TCP/IP), FTP SMTP, POP3 *1
col
Data format PDF, PDF (high compression), PDF (high compression/OCR), TIFF
PDF(OCR), JPEG, TIFF
Resolution JPEG: 300 dpi 200 dpi (MH compression)
TIFF: 300 dpi (MMR compression)
PDF/PDF (OCR) (B&W): 300 dpi (MMR compression)
PDF/PDF (OCR) (Color): 200 dpi (JPEG compression)
PDF (Compact)/PDF (compact/OCR): Text 300 dpi, background 150 dpi
System environment • Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012
• Solaris Version 2.6 or later (and Samba 2.2 or later)
• Mac OS X
• Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (and Samba 2.2 or later)
Interface 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Input image Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Color mode Color, B&W B&W
Original size AB configuration: A4 / A5 / B5
Inch configuration: Legal (LGL), Letter (LTR), Statement (STMT)

*1; In the case of E-mail transmission, POP3 can also be used only at authentication before transmission.

FAX specification
Item Specifications/Function
Line used Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) *1
Communication mode Super G3, G3
Data compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Modem speed Super G3: 33.6 Kbps, G3: 14.4 Kbps
(With automatic fallback function)
Transmission speed Approx. 3 sec. per page*2
(ECM-JBIG, sent from memory at 33.6 kbps)
Send/Receive memory Total number of sent/received pages: Approx. 512 pages *2
(Max. number of memory transmissions: 30, Max. number of memory receptions: 90)
Fax resolution Normal: 200 x 100 dpi
Fine: 200 x 200 dpi
Photo: 200 x 200 dpi
Super fine: 200 x 400 dpi
Ultra fine: 400 x 400 dpi
Dial method Favorites (19)
Coded dial (281)
Group dial (299)
Address book dial
Normal dial (entry by numeric keypad)
Auto redial
Manual redial
Sequential broadcast (310)

11
1. Product Overview

Item Specifications/Function
Reception method Auto RX
Manual RX
Remote reception by a telephone (initial setting ID: 25)
Report Output TX Report
Communication Management Report (to be output automatically for every 40 communications
by default)
RX Result Report
Number Display Not supported
Phones that can be connected Handset (option) / External phone / Answering machine / Data modem

*1: Communication may not be available depending on the conditions of telephone lines and regions.
*2: On ITU-T Test Chart No.1, by JBIG standard mode

Print speed
(Unit: sheets/min)

Paper size 1-sided 2-sided


A4 33 8.4
LTR 35 8.5

* The above values are the speed in the case of continuous printing of the same data on plain paper. Note that they may vary
depending on the usage conditions and environment of this machine.

Paper type
(Yes: Pickup possible, -: Pickup not possible)

Paper type Printer driver settings Cassette Multi-purpose Tray


Plain paper 60 to 89 g/m2 Plain Yes Yes
60 to 69 g/m2 Plain L Yes Yes
Color paper 60 to 89 g/m2 Color Yes Yes
Recycled paper 60 to 89 g/m2 Recycled Yes Yes
Heavy paper 90 to 128 g/m2 Heavy 1 Yes Yes
129 to 163 g/m2 Heavy 2 - Yes
Label paper Labels - Yes
Envelope Envelope - Yes

* Auto 2-sided printing is available only for LTR, A4 and LGL

Paper size
(Yes: Pickup possible, -: Pickup not possible)

Paper size Cassette Multi-purpose Tray


A4 210.0 mm × 297.0 mm Yes Yes
B5 182.0 mm × 257.0 mm Yes Yes
A5 148.0 mm × 210.0 mm Yes Yes
Legal (LGL) 215.9 mm × 355.6 mm Yes Yes
Letter (LTR) 215.9 mm × 279.4 mm Yes Yes
Statement (STMT) 139.7 mm × 215.9 mm Yes Yes
Executive (EXEC) 184.1 mm × 266.7 mm Yes Yes
Oficio 215.9 mm × 317.5 mm Yes Yes
Oficio (Brazil) 215.9 mm × 355.0 mm Yes Yes
Oficio (Mexico) 215.9 mm × 341.0 mm Yes Yes

12
1. Product Overview

Paper size Cassette Multi-purpose Tray


Letter (Government) 203.2 mm × 266.7 mm Yes Yes
Legal (Government) 203.2 mm × 330.2 mm Yes Yes
Foolscap 215.9 mm × 330.2 mm Yes Yes
Foolscap (Australia) 206.0 mm × 337.0 mm Yes Yes
Legal (India) 215.0 mm × 345.0 mm Yes Yes
3"×5" 76.2 mm × 127.0 mm - Yes
Envelope No.10 (COM10) 104.7 mm x 241.3 mm - Yes
Envelope Monarch 98.4 mm x 190.5 mm - Yes
Envelope C5 162.0 mm x 229.0 mm - Yes
Envelope DL 110.0 mm x 220.0 mm - Yes
Custom paper - Yes*1 Yes*2

*1: Custom paper whose width is between 105.0 mm and 216.0 mm and length between 148.0 mm and 356.0 mm can be loaded.
*2: Custom paper whose width is between 76.2 mm and 216.0 mm and length between 127.0 mm and 356.0 mm can be loaded.

13
1. Product Overview

Parts Name

External View
[1] [2]

[7]
[3]
[8]
[9]
[4]

[10]

[6] [5] [12] [11]

[13]

[14]

[22]
[15]
[21]

HAND
SET

[16]
[17]
[20]
[19] [18]

Key Name Key Name


[1] DADF [12] Pickup Cassette
[2] Document Feeder Tray [13] USB Port 2
[3] Document Delivery Tray [14] LAN Port
[4] Control Panel [15] Left Cover Unit
[5] Right Cover Unit [16] Handset Terminal
[6] MP Pickup Tray [17] External Telephone Terminal
[7] Upper Cover [18] Telephone Line Terminal
[8] USB Port 1 [19] Left Rear Cover
[9] Reader Unit [20] Power Socket
[10] Front Cover [21] Rear Lower Cover
[11] Main Power Switch [22] Rear Upper Cover

14
1. Product Overview

Cross Sectional View


■ ADF/Reader Unit
[1] [2] [3]

[5] [4]

Key Name
[1] ADF Paper Feed Roller
[2] ADF Separation Roller
[3] ADF Pickup Roller
[4] ADF Delivery roller
[5] ADF Separation Pad

■ Host Machine
[7]

[3] [4] [6] [8] [9]


[2] [10]

[1]

[18] [11]

[17]
[5] [12]

[13]

[14]
[20]
[15]

[19] [16]

Key Name Key Name


[1] Fixing delivery roller [11] MP tray pickup roller
[2] Face-down delivery roller [12] MP tray separation pad
[3] Fixing unit [13] Feed roller

15
1. Product Overview

Key Name Key Name


[4] Fixing film unit [14] Cassette pickup roller
[5] Pressure roller [15] Cassette separation pad
[6] Laser scanner unit [16] Duplex re-pickup roller
[7] Copyboard glass (scanning [17] Transfer roller
glass)
[8] Cartridge [18] Photosensitive drum
[9] Registration shutter [19] Duplex feed roller
[10] Registration roller [20] Duplex feed unit

Control Panel
[1] [4] [3] [6] [10] [11] [5] [22] [14]

[2] [16] [9] [7] [19] [20] [21] [8] [12] [17] [13] [18]

Key Name Function


[1] Home key Press to return to the home screen.
[2] Back key Press to return to the screen one layer above.
[3] Quick Guide key Press to view the operation methods and the causes/remedies of errors.
[4] Status Monitor key Press to check the job status or device status.
[5] Energy Saver key Press to manually enter/recover from energy saver mode.
[6] Numeric keys Press to enter the number of copies, zoom value and the names and numbers of
address book.
[7] Tone key Press to send the tone signal from the dial line.
[8] SYMBOLS key Press to enter symbols.
[9] Reset key Press to reset the settings (to change the settings of copy/scan/fax/media print to
standard mode).
[10] ID key Press after entering the ID and PIN to log on when Department ID Management is
enabled. After using the machine, press again to log off.
[11] Clear key Press to clear numbers such as number of copies, or text.
[12] Sound Volume key Press to adjust the volume.
[13] Start key Press to start a job.
[14] Stop key Press to stop a job.
[15] - -
[16] Touch Panel Displays a message or operation status. Displays menu, selected item, texts, num-
bers and other information when changing settings. Tap or flick the panel when per-
forming the operation.
[17] Counter key Press to display the counter status.

Key LED LED status Condition


[18] Start LED Yellow and When the machine can be started
green are lit
Unlit When the machine cannot be started
[19] Processing Data LED Yellow and Job is being operated
green are blink-
ing

16
1. Product Overview

Key LED LED status Condition


[19] Processing Data LED Yellow and • When the memory has accumulated data
green are lit • When received memory is waiting for processing
* Lighting has priority when lighting and blinking simultaneously oc-
cur.
[20] Wireless LAN LED Blue is lit Wireless LAN is connected
Blue is blinking Wireless LAN connection is being established
Unlit Wireless LAN is not connected
[21] Error LED Red is blinking When an error that can be recovered by the user (such as paper
jam, no paper/toner, etc.) occurs
Red is lit When an error that cannot be recovered by the user (service call)
occurs
* Lighting has priority when lighting and blinking simultaneously oc-
cur.
[22] Energy Saver LED Yellow and During energy saver mode/low power mode/sleep mode
green are lit
Unlit During standbys

17
2 Technical
Explanation
(Device)
Basic Configuration............................. 19
Basic Sequence.................................. 20
Document Exposure / Delivery
System.............................................21
Controller System................................25
Laser Exposure System...................... 30
Image Formation System.................... 31
Fixing System......................................36
Pickup / Feed System......................... 40
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Basic Configuration

Configuration Function
This device is roughly composed of the 6 functional blocks as shown in the figure below

• Document Exposure/Delivery System • Image Formation System


• Controller System • Fixing System
• Laser Exposure System • Pickup / Feed System

Document exposure/delivery system


ADF unit

Contact Sensor

Delivery unit
Laser Exposure System

Laser scanner
Fixing System
Cartridge
Fixing unit
Image Formation System
Photosensitive drum

MP Tray
Pickup / Feed System
Transfer roller

Main Controller system


Controller
Engine controller

Casette

Laser beam
PC Paper flow
Signal flow

19
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Basic Sequence

Basic Operational Sequence


The CPU on the Engine Controller PCB controls the operational sequence. The table below shows the operation and the purposes
in each status from start-up of the device and to last rotation after print job completion.

Status Operation
WAIT Interval from power-ON or reactivation from Activate the printer to be ready for printing.
(Wait) sleep mode upon shutting the door(s) to en- During WAIT time, the following operations
tering the print-ready status are done: pressure is applied to the pressure
roller of the Fixing Unit; check cartridges and
units being in place; move the developing
unit to the home position; and, clean the ITB.
When needed, color displacement is correc-
ted and the image is stabilized.
STBY Interval from the wait time or the last rotation Maintain the print-ready status. The printer
(STBY) to issuance of a print command from the enters the sleep mode upon receiving a
main controller or power-OFF. “sleep” command from the main controller
during the stand-by status. The printer exe-
cutes color displacement correction or im-
age stabilization upon receiving correspond-
ing commands from the main controller.
INTR Interval from issuance of a print command To make the printer ready for print jobs, ac-
(IINTR) from the main controller during the stand-by tivate high-voltage bias PCBs, the Laser
status to warming up the Fixing Unit to the Scanner Unit and the Fixing Unit.
target temperature.
PRINT Interval from the initial rotation to completion Based on the video signals input from the
(Print) of last page fixation. main controller, form the static latent image
on the photosensitive drum to transfer and
fix the toner image on paper. When a certain
pages are printed after power-ON, the de-
vice undergoes color displacement correc-
tion and/or image stabilization.
LSTR Interval from print job completion to Motor The last page of the print job is completely
(Last rotation) deactivation. delivered. In this status, the Laser Scanner
Unit and high-voltage bias PCBs are inac-
tive. The printer starts the initial rotation
upon receiving a print command from the
main controller during this status.

20
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Document Exposure / Delivery System

Document Exposure System


■ Outline
Specifications / Control / Function List

item Function / Method


Document Exposure LED
Document Scan Book mode: scan by the shift of the contact Book mode: scan by the shift of the contact image sensor (CIS)
ADF: document stream reading by fixed contact image sensor (CIS)
Scanning Resolution 300 or 600 dpi (horizontal scanner) X 600 dpi (vertical scanner)
Number Of Gradations 256 gradations
Magnification 50% to 200%
Horizontal: image processing by Main Controller PCB
Vertical: change of carriage shift speed, image processing by Main Controller PCB
Lens Rod lens array
CMOS Sensor Number of lines: 1 line
Number of pixels: 5184 pixels as total pixels (5107 pixels as effective pixels)
Maximum document scanning width: 216 mm
CS Drive Control Drive control by Reader Motor (M3)
CS HP Detection Yes
Document Size Detection None
Dirt Sensor Detection None

■ Major Components
Followings are the major components for Document Exposure System.
• The Contact Sensor to scan document
• The Reader Motor (M3), the Drive Pulley, the Drive Belt, to shift the Contact Sensor
In image scanning control, the Contact Image Sensor is shifted by rotating the Reader Motor based on the drive signal from the
Engine Controller PCB and scan the original on the Copyboard Glass. When ADF is in use, image is scanned by feeding the
originals by ADF instead of shifting the Contact Image Sensor.

Drive Belt
Drive Pulley

Reader motor (M3)

Drive Pulley Contact Image Sensor

21
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Document Feeder System


■ Outline
Pickup/Feed/Delivery Operation
The Auto Document Feeder (ADF) mounted onto this host machine is dedicated to stream-reading.
1 Motor (ADF Motor: M4) is engaged in pickup/feeding/delivery.
At the start of copy/fax/scan, the DADF Motor (M4) is driven by the drive command from the Main Controller PCB to pickup/feed
the originals set face up on the original tray one by one in order from the top. The original is scanned by the Contact Image Sensor
when moving through the Copyboard Glass, and then delivered face down to the original delivery assembly.

PS3

PS2
+3.3V

+3.3V
GND

GND
DES

DS

J926
6 5 4 3 2 1

MCON

Operation at Duplex Reading


• In order to read from the back side, the paper is temporarily reversed.

• The paper is reversed, and the back side is read.

22
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

• The paper is reversed once more, and the front side ie read.

■ Controls
● Original Detection
There are two types of Original Detection in this Equipment.
1. Original Presence / Absence Detection
Detected by DS (Document Sensor: PS3)
Setting the original onto the original tray pushes up the actuator, activating (light shielded =>light transmitted) the DS (PS3),
and resulting in detection of the presence of original.
2. Detection of the End of the Original
Detected by the DES (Document End Sensor: PS2)
The leading edge of the original that is fed pushes up the actuator, activating the DES (PS2) (light shielded =>light transmitted)
and resulting in detection of the reach of the leading edge of original. Furthermore, when the trailing edge of the original
passes the actuator position, the actuator returns to the original position, inactivating the DES (PS2) (light transmitted =>
light shielded). The trailing edge of the original is detected by this mechanism. The original length that can be scanned with
this equipment is less than 400 mm. Passing of the original longer than this results in jam stop. The original length is calculated
by the time it takes from detection of the leading edge of the original to detection of the trailing edge of the original..

NOTE:
There is no function to detect the original size (original width, length) in this equipment.

PS3

PS2
+3.3V

+3.3V
GND

GND
DES

DS

J926
6 5 4 3 2 1

MCON

● Jam Detection
The following cases are judged as jam.
1. In case of delay in reaching DS/DES or stationary during scanning of original
2. In case DS/DES is detected as ON at power-on (residual paper jam)
3. In case of detecting original of which length is 400 mm or longer
• Operation after Detection of Jam
The host machine stops scanning operation and displays "CHECK DOCUMENT" on the control panel.
In case of the model equipped with fax function (with built-in speaker), the warning beep occurs at the detection of jam.

23
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

• How to release Jam.


Remove the jammed paper and open / close the ADF upper cover

24
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Controller System

Outline
The Engine Control System controls all the other systems according to commands from the Main Controller.
The Engine Control System contains the following components:
• DC Controller
• Low-voltage Power Supply
• High-voltage Power Supply
Block diagram of the Engine Control System is shown below.

Document
Engine Control System exposure/delivery
system

Engine controller
Laser exposure system

DC controller

Image formation system

Main Controller
Low-voltage
power supply Fixing system

Pickup / Feed System


High-voltage
power supply

Option

Controls
■ Outline
The Engine Controller controls the operational sequence of the printer.
Block diagram of the Engine Controller and table of the electrical components are shown below.

25
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Engine controller

AC input
Motor
Switch
Low-voltage
power supply

Fan

Fixing unit

Solenoid

DC controller

Photointerrupter
Transfer roller High-voltage
power supply

Cartridge

Option

Laser scanner
unit
Main
controller
Operation panel

Symbol for component Component Remarks


Fan FM3 Controller Fan
FM201 Main Fan
FM203 Controller Fan
Motor M201 Main Motor
Solenoid SL201 Cassette Pickup Solenoid
SL202 Duplex Reverse Solenoid -
SL203 MP Tray Pickup Solenoid -
Switch SW1 Power Switch -
SW2 Door Switch -
Photointerrupter PS201 Duplex Reverse Sensor -
PS202 MP Tray Media Presence Sen- -
sor
PS203 Cassette Media Presence Sen- -
sor
PS204 TOP Sensor -
PS205 Media Width Sensor -
PS206 FD Tray Media Full Sensor -
PS915 Fixing Delivery Sensor -

■ Motor / Fan Control


This machine has a motor for paper feeding and image formation and 2 fans for control of temperature increase inside the printer.
Arrangement of Motor and the specifications are shown below.

26
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

FM1/FM2

M1

FM3

Symbol Description Function Failure de-


tection
M1 Main Motor To drive the rollers of the printer and the rollers of the Paper Feeder Yes
FM2(Except Main Fan To cool inside the printer
EUR)
FM1(EUR only)
FM3 Controller Fan To cool the Controller Assembly

■ Failure Detection
Failure Point Cause of Failure
Main Motor In the case that the speed of Motor does not reach the specified
speed after the specified time has passed since the startup of the
Main Motor.
Main Fan In the case that the Fan has been locked continuously for the speci-
fied period of time since the startup of the Main Fan Motor.

Low-voltage Power Supply


■ Outline
The Low-voltage power supply converts AC Power from the power receptacle into DC Power to cover the DC loads.
Block diagram of the Low Voltage Power Supply is shown below.

27
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Power switch
(SW1,SW11)
Engine controller

Low-voltage power supply

Fixing
Noise control
filter Fixing unit
circuit
Fuse
High-voltage
(FU101)
power supply
(FU1002)

(FU1001)
Fuse

Fuse

+24P1

DOOR
SNS FET Main motor, etc.
Noise filter
+24U

+24V
+24V generation
circuit Door switch
(SW301)

+24V_S
FET
+5V
generation +5V
circuit Main controller
Protection
circuit
+3.3V +3.3V
generation +3.3V
circuit
DC controller

■ Protective Function
The Low-voltage Power Supply has a protective function against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent failures in the power
supply circuit. If there flows an overcurrent or an overvoltage, the system automatically cuts off the output voltage.
If the DC Power is not being supplied from the Low-voltage Power Supply, the protective function may be running. In such case,
turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. Do not plug in the power cord or turn the power switch on again until the
root cause is found.
In addition, two fuses in the Low-voltage Power Supply protect against overcurrent.
If overcurrent lows into the AC line, the fuse blows and cuts off the power distribution.

■ Safety
For user and service technician's safety, the printer has a function to interrupt 24V power supply.
The door switch is turned off and 24V power supply to the Fixing Assembly and the High-voltage Power Supply Unit stops under
the following condition:
• If the cartridge door is opened (SW2 is turned off)

■ Low-voltage Power Supply Unit Failure Detection


The Engine Controller determines a Low-voltage power supply unit failure and stops +24V output. Once 24V output is stopped,
3.3V of the engine CPU stops, so notification is not made. Likely, 3.3V of the controller stops, so the machine seems power-off.
• +24V is higher than a specified voltage
• +3.3V is higher than a specified voltage
• +5V is higher than a specified voltage

■ Power-Saving Mode
This is the function to save power consumed by the printer.

28
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

The table below lists various power-saving modes.

Power-Saving Mode Status


Stand-by at power-OFF on the reader
Power-saving at power-OFF on the reader
The control panel enters the power-saving
mode.
Sleep Sleep1 A / 1B at power-OFF on the reader and the engine
The control panel enters the power-saving
mode.
Sleep2 at power-OFF on the reader and the engine
Sleep3 at power-OFF on the reader and the engine
The control panel and main controler enters
the power-saving mode.

* The reader is turned ON only when it is used.

Reader Control panel


Service
State of power
supply ON error
Energy Saving
Power OFF
State of power
supply OFF
Engine Main Controler
Enters
Power ON auto-shutdown status
Service error

Automatically
shifted
Sleep 1B depending on
the conditions
Sleep 3
Standby recovery event

Enters Non-all-night
auto-sleep status 24V OFF
Standby
Standby Automatically
Energy Start shifted depending
recovery / complete jobs
event Saver on the conditions

Sleep 1A
Press Enters
[Power-saving] auto-sleep
key status

Non-all-night
24V OFF

Detects hook
Start / complete jobs (Eco-recovery OFF) Press [Power-saving] key
(Eco-recovery
not supported) Enters auto-sleep status

Print Sleep 2
Start / complete jobs

29
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Laser Exposure System

Outline
The Laser Exposure System forms a latent image on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signals sent from the Main
Controller.
The main components of the Laser Scanner are the Laser Unit and the Scanner Motor Unit, which are controlled by the signals
sent from the Engine Controller.
Diagram of the Laser Scanner Unit is shown below.

Engine controller

DC controller
SCANNER MOT OR SPEED CONTROL signal

Main controller

LASER CONTROL signal

VIDEO signal

BD INPUT signal
Laser unit

Scanner mirror
BD sensor

Scanner motor unit

Photosensitive drum

Optical Unit Failure Detection


The Optical Unit failure detection manages the Laser Scanner failure detection functions.
The Engine Controller determines an Optical Unit failure and notifies the Main Controller if the Laser Scanner encounters the
following conditions:
• After the drive of Scanner Motor, BD within a specified period is not detected.
• If the Scanner Motor does not reach a specified rotation within a specified period of start-up.
• If an out of specified BD interval is detected during a print operation.

30
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Image Formation System

Outline
The Image-Formation System forms a toner image on print media.
The following are the main components of the Image-Formation system:
• Cartridge
• Transfer Roller
• Fixing Unit
• Laser Scanner
The Engine Controller controls the Laser Scanner and High-voltage power supply to form the toner image on the photosensitive
drum. The image is transferred to the print media and fixed.
Diagram of the image formation system is shown below.

Laser scanner

Laser beam

Cartridge
Fixing film

Fixing unit Photosensitive drum


Pressure roller
Transfer roller

Engine controller
High-voltage power supply

DC controller

Image Formation Process


■ Outline
The Image-Formation process consists of the following seven steps divided among five functional blocks:
Latent Image Formation Block
Step 1: Primary charging
Step 2: Laser-beam exposure
Developing Block
Step 3: Developing
Transfer Block
Step 4: Transfer
Step 5: Separation
Fixing Block
Step 6: Fixing
Drum Cleaning Block
Step 7: Drum cleaning

31
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Media path Latent image formation


Direction of
the drum rotation 2. Laser-beam exposure
Block

Step
1. Primary charging Developing

3. Developing
Drum cleaning
7. Drum cleaning

Delivery 6. Fixing 5. Separation 4.Transfer Pickup

Fixing Transfer

■ Latent Image Formation Block


During the two steps that comprise this block, an invisible latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum.

Step 1: Primary Charging


To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform negative potential. The
primary charging bias is applied to the primary charging roller and the roller charges the drum directly.

Primary charging roller

Photosensitive drum Primary charging bias

Step 2: Laser-beam Exposure


The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge on portions of the drum surface. An electrostatic
latent image forms where the negative charge was neutralized.

Laser beam

Unexposed area Exposed area

■ Developing Block
Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum, which becomes visible.

Step 3: Developing
Toner acquires a negative charge from the friction that occurs when the developing roller rotates against the developing blade.
The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the photosensitive drum surface because the drum surface has
a higher potential. The developing bias is applied to the developing roller.

32
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Blade

Developing rolle

Exposed Unexposed
area area
Unexposed Exposed Developing bias
area area

Photosensitive drum

■ Transfer Block
During the two steps that comprise this block, a toner image on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the print media.

Step 4: Transfer
The transfer bias is applied to the transfer roller to charge the print media positive. The positively charged media attracts the
negatively charged toner from the photosensitive drum surface.

Photosensitive
drum

Media

Transfer roller

Transfer bias

Step 5: Separation
The elasticity of the print media and the curvature of the photosensitive drum cause the media to separate from the drum surface.
The static charge eliminator reduces back side static discharge of the media for stable media feed and image quality.

Photosensitive
drum

Media

Static charge
eliminator
Transfer roller

■ Fixing Block
The toner image is fixed onto the print media.

33
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Step 6: Fixing
The printer uses an on-demand Fixing method. The toner image is permanently affixed to the print media by heat and pressure.
The Fixing bias is applied to the Fixing Film to improve image quality.

Fixing film Fixing heater

Toner

Media

Pressure roller

Fixing bias

■ Drum Cleaning Block


The residual toner is cleared from the photosensitive drum surface.

Step 7: Drum Cleaning


The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum. The residual toner is deposited in the
toner collection box.

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
Toner drum
collection box

High-voltage Power Supply


■ Outline
The High-voltage Power Supply applies biases to the following components:
• Primary Charging Roller
• Developing Roller
• Transfer Roller
• Fixing Flm
The Engine controller controls the High-voltage Power Supply to generate biases.

34
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Engine controller

High-voltage
DC controller power supply Fixing unit
Fixing film

Pressure roller

FB Cartridge
Primary
charging PR
bias circuit Primary charging roller
Developing roller

Developing DV
bias circuit Photosensitive
drum

Transfer roller

Transfer TR
bias circuit

35
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Fixing System

Outline
The Fixing/Delivery Unit fixes the toner onto a print paper and delivers it to the Delivery Tray.
The operation of the Fixing/Delivery Unit is explained in the following.
1. The print paper fed from the Pickup/Feed Unit is fused the toner by the Fixing Film and the pressure roller.
2. The print paper delivered from the Fixing Assembly is delivered to the face-down Delivery Tray or the face-up Delivery slot.
When the engine controller detects that the heater temperature reaches 50 deg C after the last rotation is completed, it drives
the main Motor for 50 msec. and dislocates the nip part. This prevents the toner adhering to the pressure roller.
The Fixing Assembly of this printer utilizes the on-demand Fixing method. It is structured as shown below.
• Heater:
This Fixing Assembly incorporates one heater.
Fixing Heater (H201/2010): To heat the Fixing Film (ceramic heater)
• Thermistor:
This Fixing Assembly incorporates one thermistor.
Thermistor (TH1/11): Sit almost at the center of the Fixing Film. (contact type)
To control the temperature of the Fixing Film
• Thermal switch:
Thermoswitch (TP201/2010): Sit almost at the center of the Fixing Film (contact type)
If the temperature of the heater rises abnormally high, the contact gets broken and cuts off the AC Voltage Supply to the Fixing
Heater to interrupt the power supply to the heater.
The temperature control of the Fixing Assembly incorporated as above is operated by the Fixing temperature control circuit
according to the command from the CPU (IC201) on the DC Controller.
The followings describe the each circuit and function of the temperature control of the Fixing Assembly.

Fixing unit

Fixing film

Thermistor

Fixing heater

Thermoswitch

Pressure roller
FIXING TEMPERATURE
DETECTION signal
FIXING TEMPERATURE
CONTROL signal

Fixing temperature
control circuit CPU

Engine controller PCB

Controls
The Fixing control circuit controls the temperature in the Fixing Assembly.

36
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

The printer uses an on-demand Fixing method.


The figure below shows the configuration of the Fixing control circuit.

H1
Fixing film
TP1

TH1
Pressure roller

FIXING TEMPERA TURE signal

FIXNG HEATER CONTROL signal

Fixing heater Fixing heater


DC controller control circuit safety circuit

Fixing control circuit


Low-voltage power supply unit

Engine controller

• Fixing Heater (H1): Heats the Fixing Film


• Thermistor (TH1): Detects Fixing temperature (Contact type)
• Thermoswitch (TP1):Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of the Fixing Heater (Contact type)
These temperature controls in the Fixing Assembly are performed by the Fixing Heater control circuit and the Fixing Heater safety
circuit according to the commands from the DC Controller.

■ Throughput Reduction Control


During continuous printing, the throughput is changed to reduce heat buildup on parts not in contact with paper, to improve Fixing
characteristics and reduce curling.
The throughput reduction is implemented according to the following conditions.

Small Size Paper Speed Control

Fixing Mode Throughput


ENVELOPE 1 - 2 imprints 3 - 4 imprints 5 imprints 8 6 imprints or
more
17 ppm 12 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm
ENVELOPE2 1 - 3 imprints 4 - 7 imprints 8 - 22 imprints 23 imprints or
more
17 ppm 12 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm
ENVELOPE3 1 - 3 imprints 4 - 5 imprints 6 imprints or
more
12 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm
Postcard 1 - 3 imprints 4 - 5 imprints 6 imprints or
more
12 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm
Long Narrow Normal / Light / OHT 1 - 280 imprints 281 imprints or
more
2 ppm 1 ppm
Label / Heavy1 / Heavy2 1 imprints or
Envelope / Envelope2 / Envelope3 more
3 ppm

37
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

16K Paper Speed Control

Fixing Mode Throughput


Normal / Light / OHT (Normal mode) 1 - 27 imprints 28 - 39 imprints 40 - 79 imprints 80 - 199 imprints 200 imprints or
more
16 ppm 14 ppm 12 ppm 10 ppm 8 ppm
Normal / Light / OHT 1 imprints or more
6 ppm
Envelope2 / Quiet 1 - 89 imprints 90 imprints or
more
17 ppm 14 ppm
Label / Envelope / Envelope3 1 - 34 imprints 35 imprints or
Heavy1 / Heavy2 / Postcard more
17 ppm 8 ppm

■ Fixing Temperature Control


The Fixing temperature control maintains the temperature of the Fixing Heater at its targeted temperature.
Block diagram of this control is shown below.

Engine controller
Low-voltage power supply

Fixing control circuit DC controller


Frequency FREQSNS
detection circuit
Fixing heater FSRD
+24V control circuit

Relay RLYD
control
circuit RL101

Fixing heater FSRTH


safety circuit

Fixing film unit

TH1 TP1 H1: Fixing heater

Pressure roller TP1: Thermoswitch


TH1: Thermistor

Fixing unit

The DC Controller monitors the FIXING TEMPERATURE (FSRTH) signal and sends the FIXING HEATER CONTROL (FSRD)
signal according to the detected temperature. The Fixing Heater control circuit controls the Fixing Heater depending on the signal
so that the heater remains at the targeted temperature.

■ Protective Function
The protective function detects an abnormal temperature rise in the Fixing Assembly and interrupts power supply to the Fixing
Heater.

38
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

The following three protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the Fixing Heater:
• DC Controller
• Fixing Heater safety circuit
• Thermoswitch
1. DC Controller
The DC Controller monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. The DC Controller makes the FIXING HEATER
CONTROL signal inactive and releases the relay to interrupt power supply to the Fixing Heater under the following condition:
2. Fixing Heater safety circuit
The Fixing Heater safety circuit monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor.
The Fixing Heater safety circuit releases the relay control circuit to interrupt power supply to the Fixing Heater under the
following condition:
3. Thermoswitch
The contact of the thermoswitch is broken to interrupt power supply to the Fixing Heater under the following condition:

■ Failure Detection
The DC Controller determines a Fixing Assembly failure, makes the FIXING HEATER CONTROL signal inactive, releases the
relay to interrupt power supply to the Fixing Heater and notifies the formatter of a failure state when it encounters the following
conditions:
1. Start-up failure
• If the detected temperature of the thermistor is kept a specified degrees or higher for a specified period of heater start-
up during the wait period.
• If the detected temperature of the thermistor is kept a specified degrees or lower for a specified period under the heater
temperature control during the print period.
• If the detected temperature of the thermistor does not reach its targeted temperature within a specified period under the
heater temperature control during the initial rotation period.
2. Abnormal low temperature
• If the detected temperature of the thermistor is kept a specified degrees or lower for a specified period under the heater
temperature control.
3. Abnormal high temperature
• If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept a specified degrees or higher for a specified period.
4. Drive circuit failure
• If a specified frequency of the FREQUENCY signal is not detected within a specified period after the printer is turned
on.

39
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Pickup / Feed System

Outline
The Media Feed System picks up, feeds and delivers the print media. It consists of several types of rollers.
The Duplex Feed Unit in the Duplex model reverses and Refeeds the print media to print on both sides of media.
The media path is shown below.

Face-down delivery roller

Fixing film MP tray separattion roller


Photosensitive drum

Pressure
roller
Transfer roller Registration roller
Fixing delivery roller MP tray
Duplex re-pickup roller separattion pad
Duplex feed roller

Cassette pickup roller Cassette


separation pad

: Simplex media path


: Duplex media path

Drive Configuration
Diagram and table of the electrical components are shown below.

40
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

SL2

PS206
M1 SL3

PS915

PS202

PS205
PS201 PS204

PS203

SL1

Electrical component Symbol Signal


Main Motor M1 Main Motor Control Signal
Cassette Pickup Solenoid SL1 Cassette Pickup Solenoid Control Signal
MP Tray Pickup Solenoid SL3 MP Tray Pickup Solenoid Control Signal
Duplex Reverse Solenoid SL2 Duplex Reverse Solenoid Control Signal
TOP Sensor PS204 TOP Signal
Cassette Media Presence Sensor PS203 Cassette Media Presence Signal
MP Tray Presence Sensor PS202 MP Tray Media Presence Signal
Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915 Fixing Delivery Signal
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201 Duplex Reverse Signal
FD Tray Media Full Sensor PS206 FD Tray Media Full Signal
Media Width Sensor PS205 Media Width Signal

Jam Detection
■ Outline
The printer uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check whether media is being fed correctly or has
jammed:
• TOP Sensor (PS204)
• Fixing Delivery Sensor (PS915)
• Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS201)
• Media Width Sensor (PS205)

41
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

PS915
PS201 PS205 PS204

: Simplex media path


: Duplex media path

■ Pickup Delay Jam


When the TOP Sensor (PS204) cannot detect the leading edge of paper within the specified time after starting pickup from a
cassette, pickup retry is executed twice. After that, the sensor still cannot detect the leading edge of paper within the specified
time, it is judged as a pickup jam.

■ Pickup Stationary Jam


When the TOP Sensor (PS204) cannot detect the trailing edge of paper after the specified time has passed since it detected the
leading edge of paper, it is judged as a pickup stationary jam.

■ Delivery Delay Jam


When the Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) cannot detect the leading edge of paper after the specified time
has passed since the TOP Sensor (PS204) detected the leading edge of paper, it is judged as a delivery delay jam.

■ Fixing Paper Wrap Jam


After judging that it is not a delivery delay jam, execute the detection of Fixing paper wrap jam.
It is judged as a Fixing paper wrap jam when all of the following conditions are met: after the specified time had passed since the
Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) detected the leading edge of paper, after the specified time had passed
since the TOP Sensor (PS204) detected the leading edge of paper, and the Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150)
detects no paper.

42
2. Technical Explanation (Device)

■ Delivery Stationary Jam


After judging that it is not a Fixing paper wrap, execute the detection of delivery stationary jam.
When the Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) does not detect no paper within the specified time since the TOP
Sensor (PS204) detected the trailing edge of paper, it is judged as a delivery stationary jam.

■ Reverse Delay Jam


After judging that it is not a delivery stationary jam, execute the detection of reverse stationary jam.
When the Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS201) does not detect paper after the specified time has passed since the Fixing Delivery
Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) detected the trailing edge of paper, it is judged as a reverse delay jam.

■ Reverse Stationary Jam


When the Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS201) cannot detect the trailing edge of paper after the specified time has passed since the
sensor detected the leading edge of paper, it is judged as a reverse stationary jam.

■ Internal Residual Jam


When a paper is detected by the TOP Sensor (PS204), Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150), Paper Width Sensor
(PS205), or Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS201) at the time of starting initial rotation, it is judged as an internal residual jam.

■ Door Open Jam


When a door-open is detected while feeding papers, it is judged as a door open jam.

43
3 Technical
Explanation
(System)
Overview of System Management...... 45
Version Upgrade................................. 46
Setting Information Export/Import
Function (DCM)............................... 53
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote)..................... 84
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Overview of System Management


This chapter describes information for service technicians on the system of this machine.
Although this chapter contains some information described in the User's Guide, for details on the functions for users, refer to the
e-Manual.

45
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Version Upgrade

Function Overview
The following firmware upgrade methods are available with this device.
Version upgrade using User Support Tool (UST)
Upgrade the firmware of the device using UST.
Open the file for UST version upgrade on a PC connected with the device and upgrade the firmware.
Since the work is performed by connecting the host machine and the PC using a USB Cable, version upgrade can be
performed also in an environment where network is not available.

Version upgrade via Internet


Access the dedicated server, and download and update the firmware.
Provided that Internet connection is available, the system automatically configures the connection destination setting and
executes processing such as download and version upgrade.

Version upgrade by replacing the PCB


Version upgrade by replacing the existing PCB with a PCB where the latest firmware is installed

Version upgrade using Local CDS


Use iW EMC/iW MC and DFU plug-in to download firmware from Local CDS and upgrade the host machine.

NOTE:
When using Local CDS to upgrade it, refer to the manual/material of iW EMC/iW MC DFU plug-in.

CAUTION:
A message appears when an attempt is made to upgrade a host machine to which specified firmware has been applied.
This is a precaution not to use wrong firmware to upgrade a host machine to which specified firmware has been applied.
See the following regarding the combination of whether the message will be displayed:

Function Overview

Type of firmware applied to the Firmware to upgrade


host machine General firmware Specified firmware
General firmware No message No message
Specified firmware Message displayed Message displayed

Version Upgrade Using UST


This section describes the procedure of [Version Upgrade Using UST] by directly connecting the host machine and the PC using
a USB Cable and upgrading the firmware.

PC
Firmware
Firmware

USB cable/
Network cable

46
3. Technical Explanation (System)

■ Required System Environment


PC (All the following conditions must be met.)
One of the following OS should be running.
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows Vista
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008
• Microsoft Windows 7
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012
• Microsoft Windows 8
All the following hardware requirements must be met.
• Memory (RAM): 128 MB or more
• Hard disk: Free space of 100 MB or more
• Display: resolution of 640 x 480 pixels or more, 256 colors or more
• A USB port must be installed.

Others
UST file of the device*1
USB Cable (USB 1.1/2.0)

■ Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware Using UST


1. Start a PC and connect it with the host machine using a USB Cable.

2. Turn ON the power of the machine and let it enter standby mode.

3. Select the key/menu shown below to enter download mode.


• Select the home key or [Menu] key > [System Management Settings] > [Update Firmware] > [Via PC] > select [Yes].

Menu System Management Settings Update Firmware Update firmware ?


Scan Settings PDL Selection (Plug and Play) Via PC Must turn main power
MEmory Media Settings Register License Via Internet OFF/ON after update
Printer Settings Update Firmware Version Information
Adjust memory /Maintenance Initialize key and Certificate
System Management Settings Initialize Addres Book Yes No
Output Report Initialize Menu

4. Open the UST file (file for version upgrade) on the connected PC side.

*1. Available on system CD distributed by the sales company or by download from the release service website.

47
3. Technical Explanation (System)

5. Write down the version of the firmware to be updated, and then click "Next".

6. Check the displayed contents, and then click [Next].

48
3. Technical Explanation (System)

7. Select [USB connected device], and click [Next].

NOTE:
If you connect the host machine and the PC using a LAN Cable for this work, select [Specify by IP address], and enter the IP
address of the device.

8. Check the displayed contents, and then click [Start].

49
3. Technical Explanation (System)

9. A warning screen will appear. Click "Yes".

Download will start.

10. When the download is completed, click "OK" and restart the host machine.

CAUTION:
When the Control Panel still shows the download screen even after the host machine is restarted, the internal
firmware update has not been completed. Leave it as is for 10 minutes or more and press the Stop button.

11. Select the following menu, and check that the firmware has been correctly upgraded:
• [System Management Settings] > [Update Firmware] > [Version Information]

Update Firmware Version Information


Via PC Main Controller :
Via Internet Ver. 00.73
Version Information Boot ROM :
Ver. 00.25
DCON :
Close

Version Upgrade via Internet


Connect to the Internet using the network function of the device, and download and upgrade the latest firmware from the server.
If the device is in an environment where Internet connection is available, firmware versions can be upgraded only by operation
from the menu without using PC.

50
3. Technical Explanation (System)

■ Prerequisite
In order to perform version upgrade of the device via Internet, the following conditions must be met.

There should be no other jobs being executed.


Firmware cannot be upgraded while there is a job being executed. If there is a job being executed, wait for completion of the
job and then perform the work.

The device should be able to be connected to the external network.


If connection is not available because, for example, there is a proxy server, follow the e-Manual to configure the proxy server
settings and enable connection to the external network.

The serial number of the host machine should be shown on the Main Controller PCB.
Whether or not the serial number of the host machine is shown on the Main Controller PCB can be checked from the Control
Panel or SPEC REPORT.

Procedure to check from the Control Panel


1. Press the counter key, and select [Check Device Configuration].

Check Counter Check Device Configuration


Check device Configuration Serial Number : ZZZ00000
Barcode Printing

Close

Procedure to check from SPEC REPORT


1. Execute the following service mode to print SPEC REPORT.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P> SPEC
2. Check if the serial number (3 alphabetical characters + 5-digit number) is shown in [BODY No.] of the printed SPEC
REPORT.

******************************
*** SPEC REPORT ***
******************************
Device Info ZZ999 Series
ROM Version
MAIN 00.75
BOOT 00.25
LANG 01.36
ECONT 00.10
PANEL 05.01
Device Code A0000000
Locale 9
Voltage TYpe 0
BODY No. ZZZ99999

Factory Flag 12345678

■ Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware via Internet


1. Select the following menu to upgrade the firmware via Internet:
• [System Management Settings] > [Update Firmware] > [Via Internet] > [Yes]

51
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Menu System Management Settings Update Firmware Update firmware ?


Scan Settings PDL Selection (Plug and Play) Via PC Must turn main power
MEmory Media Settings Register License Via Internet OFF/ON after update
Printer Settings Update Firmware Version Information
Adjust memory /Maintenance Initialize key and Certificate
System Management Settings Initialize Addres Book Yes No
Output Report Initialize Menu

When the upgrading of firmware is completed, the machine automatically restarts.

2. Select the following menu, and check that the firmware has been correctly upgraded:
• [System Management Settings] > [Update Firmware] > [Version Information]

Update Firmware Version Information


Via PC Main Controller :
Via Internet Ver. 00.73
Version Information Boot ROM :
Ver. 00.25
DCON :
Close

CAUTION:
This function does not support the operations from remote UI. ([System Management Settings] menu of remote UI does
not have the item of [Update Firmware].)

■ Messages
The message displayed on the device operation panel is as follows.

No Error message The timing of oc- Remedy


. currence
1 Job in progress... Wait a moment, then try again. If there is a job being 1. Wait until the job is completed.
executed: 2. Cancel the job.
2 Cannot check the firmware version. (Server com- Network error 1. Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
munication error.) ternal network.
2. Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in
case of access via a proxy server).
3 Cannot download the firmware. (Error during 1. Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
download.) ternal network.
2. Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in
case of access via a proxy server).
3. Check that the serial number of the host machine is
shown on the Main Controller PCB.
4 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** NETWORK AVAILA- If update (writing) of 1. Update the firmware again using UST.
BLE IP ADRESS IP address of the machine the firmware has
PRESS STOP KEY TO EXIT ended in failure:
5 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** FAILED TO UPDATE
6 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** UPDATE IS COM- If the update of the -
PLETE firmware is suc-
cessful

52
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)

Overview
Various data is stored in the storage inside the device.
Depending on the works to be done such as replacing parts, this data needs to be backed up and restored.
There are some ways to back up and restore data, and the appropriate one should be used depending on the purpose and storage
destination.
This section describes the procedure for backing up and restoring service mode setting values.
For the procedure for backing up and restoring other information, refer to the backup data list in the Appendix.

■ Function Overview
This machine has a setting information export/import function (hereinafter referred to as DCM (Device Configuration Management)
function) which exports/imports the machine's setting value information as a file. The file exported/imported using the DCM
function is called a DCM file, and the target setting information is as follows:
• Setting information of [Settings/ Registration]
• Setting information of service mode
• Address Book
The DCM file is exported to a USB flash drive or PC local disk from the Control Panel or remote UI.
The exported DCM file can be returned to the original device or imported to a different device.
When the file is returned to the original device, this can be used as a setting backup function, and when the file is imported to a
different device, this can be used as a setting information migration function.
Data can also be imported to or exported from an iR-ADV machine by using iW EMC/MC DCM Plug-in.
In the case of the setting value backup function before DCM, an exported file could be imported to the same device, but the DCM
function enables import of an exported file to a different device.

DCM support device DCM


DCM

USB memory
device DCM file
DCM file
DCM
DCM DCM support
Settings/
device
Registration DCM file
DCM file
Remote UI DCM

Service mode DCM

DCM

DCM file DCM support


iW EMC/MC
iR-ADV
with DCM Plug-in DCM file

Image

NOTE:
In order to export or import setting information using DCM, it is necessary that the device supports DCM.

■ Backup/Restoration for Service Technicians


Backup and Restoration from the [Settings/Registration] Menu
Setting information can be backed up and restored from the Control Panel of the device or from the [Settings/Registration] menu
of remote UI.
Although the [Settings/Registration] menu is for users, the service mode settings information can be backed up and restored from
the Import/Export function by changing the service mode setting.
In order to back up and restore the service mode setting information from the [Settings/Registration] menu, it is necessary to
access from remote UI.

Backup/Restoration Using Service Mode


Some of the functions in service mode can be used to backup and restore data.
DC-CON/R-CON setting value information and service counter (DC-CON) values can be backed up and restored.

53
3. Technical Explanation (System)

■ Combination of Information Exported/Imported by DCM, Means, and Storage


Locations
A DCM file is exported and imported using the Control Panel, remote UI, or the iW EMC server, depending on the situation of the
site.
The information exported/imported differs depending on the means.
Combinations of them are shown in the following table.

Menu used Operation Information exported Save destination


Setting values of Address book**1 Service mode set-
menu options ting
values
[Settings/Registra- Control panel Yes (fixed)*2 Yes (fixed)*3 No USB flash drive
tion] Remote UI Yes Yes USB flash drive
With conditions*3
menu
Service mode Control panel No No Yes USB flash drive / Storage in the
host machine
Remote UI No No Yes PC local disk

■ Compatibility of Data
The following table shows compatibility of data in the case where the device from which the data is exported and the device to
which the data is imported differ in model and/or serial number.
For items that are imported in Cases A, B, and C, refer to “List of Items Which Can Be Imported” on page 61.

Model Serial number Import process


Same Same Items corresponding to Case A are imported.*4
Same Different*5 Items corresponding to Case B are imported.*6
Different Different*6 Items corresponding to Case C are imported.*6
Different Same The file is judged to be invalid, and the process ends with an error.

■ Replacement Mode
When this function is used for migrating the setting data upon replacement of a device, some of the data cannot be migrated
depending on the model to which the data is migrated.
When this function is used in normal mode, data that is applicable to either Case A (of different serial number) or Case B (of
different mode) cannot be imported.
When replacement mode is enabled, data can be forcibly migrated even to a device of a different serial number or even between
different models.

Normal mode Replace mode


Case A Case A

Case B Case B

Case C Case C

*1. Models without address books are excluded. In the case of a fax option model without SEND function, address books are
exported only if a fax option is connected with the device.
*2. When the [Settings/ Registration] menu is used from the Control Panel, both the setting menu information and the address book
are imported/exported. It is not possible to export/import only either of them.
Information which is not included in the data to be imported is not imported.
*3. Service mode is added to the data to be exported only when service mode level 1 > COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT is
set.
For information on items that are imported, refer to “List of Items Which Can Be Imported” on page 61.
*4. If the firmware version at the time of import differs from that at the time of export, predetermined corrective processing may be
performed.
*5. If a serial number is missing, the serial numbers are judged to be mismatched.
*6. Predetermined corrective processing may be performed.

54
3. Technical Explanation (System)

The following shows the procedure to turn ON/OFF replacement mode:

1. Set the following service mode setting value to "1":


• COPIER > OPTION > USER > RPL-IMP

NOTE:
Refer to “List of Items Which Can Be Imported” on page 61 for the target data of replacement mode.

CAUTION:
Since replacement mode does not automatically return to OFF, be sure to change the above service mode setting value
back to "0".

Import/Export Procedure from [Settings/Registration] of Remote UI


This section describes the procedure for backing up and restoring service mode setting information by using the [Import/Export]
function in the [Settings/Registration] menu of Remote UI.

CAUTION:
• The service mode setting information can be backed up and restored only from the [Settings/Registration] menu on
Remote UI, and the operation cannot be performed from the [Settings/Registration] menu on the Control Panel.
• In the case of backing up and restoring only the setting information of the [Settings/Registration] menu or the address
book, refer to the procedure described in the e-Manual.

■ Limitations
The following limitations exist when backing up and restoring the service mode settings information from the [Settings/
Registrations] menu of remote UI.

A job must not be accepted during an import/export processing.


Except for the calibration requested by the engine, a job is not allowed to be accepted during a processing. In addition, import/
export must not be performed during execution of a job.

Firmware must not be updated during an import/export processing.


Fax cannot be received while firmware is updated during a processing. In addition, import/export must not be performed also
during firmware update.

Power must not be turned off during an import/export processing.


If power discontinuity occurs during an import processing, a rollback processing is not performed, therefore the settings
imported up to that point are reflected while the rest of the settings remain as-is.
When power discontinuity occurs during an export processing, export is not executed.

■ Procedure for Export Using Remote UI ([System Management Settings] Menu)


Service mode setting information can be exported from the [System Management Settings] menu by setting the following service
mode setting value to "1".

55
3. Technical Explanation (System)

1. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "1".


• COPIER > OPRION > USER > SMD-EXPT

TNRB-SW : 0
SCALL-SW : 0
SCALLCMP : 0
PS-MODE : 0
SMD-EXPT : 1
ALL-SLP : 1
RPL-IMP : 0

NOTE:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be specified either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.

2. Exit service mode, start remote UI, log in as a system administrator, and then select the following item:
• [Settings/Registration] > [Import/Export] > [Export]

3. After confirming that [Service Mode] is displayed/selected in [Select Item to Export], enter the password and click
[Start Exporting].

Address Book
Select the check box to export the Address Book data.

Settings/ Registration
Select the check box to export the setting data of the menu options.

Encryption Password
Enter 32 or less numeric characters set when the file was exported.

56
3. Technical Explanation (System)

4. The File Download dialog box will appear. Save the file to any location.

5. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "0".


• COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT

CAUTION:
Since the screen of export function can also be accessed by the user, be sure to disable the [SMD-EXPT] setting (setting
value: 0).

■ Procedure for Import Using Remote UI ([System Management Settings] Menu)


Import the service mode setting information file that was exported in the previous procedure.

1. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "1".


• COPIER > OPRION > USER > SMD-EXPT

TNRB-SW : 0
SCALL-SW : 0
SCALLCMP : 0
PS-MODE : 0
SMD-EXPT : 1
ALL-SLP : 1
RPL-IMP : 0

NOTE:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be specified either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.

2. Exit service mode, start remote UI, log in as a system administrator, and then select the following item:
• [Settigs/Registration] > [Import/Export] > [Import]

57
3. Technical Explanation (System)

3. Configure the import setting, and click [Start Importing].


Entering the encryption password and clicking [Start Importing] imports the menu option data.

[Browse..]button
Click to select the file to import.

Decryption Password
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the password that was set when the file was exported.
Address Book
Select the check box to import the Address Book data.

Settings/Registration
Select the check box to import the setting data of the menu options.

4. A dialog box asking whether the user wants to execute import will appear. Click [OK].

5. A message will appear to indicate that the process has been completed. Click the [OK] button.

6. Restart the host machine, enter service mode, and then check that the setting information is reflected. This
completes the procedure for importing a setting information file.

7. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "0".


• COPIER > OPRION > USER > SMD-EXPT

CAUTION:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be specified either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.

58
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information


Service mode setting information can be backed up and restored by using service mode functions. The backup file can be saved
to a USB flash drive or a storage in the machine.

Backup/restoration to a USB flash drive


COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > EXPORT
COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > IMPORT

Backup/restoration to a storage in the machine


COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > SAVE-SM
COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > RSTR-SM

Backup/restoration to a USB flash drive Backup/restoration to a storage in the machine


Storage destination USB flash drive Storage in the machine
Number of files saved Depends on the capacity of the USB flash drive One
Duplication of the setting Possible Not possible
values for other machines

■ Procedure for Exporting to a USB Flash Drive


Use the service mode function to save the service mode setting information to a USB flash drive.
With this model, service mode can be used from the Remote UI.
The following USB flash drives can be used for export/import.
• USB flash drive in FAT 16 format (storage capacity: 2 GB)
• USB flash drive in FAT 32 format (storage capacity: 32 GB)
Note that the descriptions in parenthesis in the procedure are the descriptions in the case of remote UI.

1. Connect a USB memory device to the USB memory port.

2. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT

PANEL-UP
LOGWRITE DISPLAY
IMPORT IO CCD
EXPORT ADJUST CLEAR
FUNCTION MISC-R
OPTION MISC-P
COUNTER SYSTEM
VIFFNC
SPLMAN

CAUTION:
When it is executed without connecting USB flash drive, the error message is not displayed.
Processing doesn't export anywhere of any though it seems to have completed it correctly.
Confirm USB memory device has been connected before it executes it from the above-mentioned reason without fail.

59
3. Technical Explanation (System)

3. The message shown below which is displayed during the process will disappear. When the display has returned to
the original state, remove the USB flash drive.

Executing...

4. Check that a setting information file (service.dcm) exists in the directory directly under the root of the USB flash
drive.
This completes the procedure for exporting a setting information file.

■ Procedure for Import from USB Flash Drive


1. To the directory directly under the root of the USB flash drive, save a setting information file (service.dcm) to be
imported.

2. Connect a USB memory device to the USB memory port.

3. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT

SERVICE MODE
DISPLAY
COPIER IO CCD
CLEAR PANEL-UP
FEEDER ADJUST LOGWRITE
FAX FUNCTION MISC-R
MISC-P IMPORT
TESTMODE OPTION EXPORT
COUNTER SYSTEM
VIFFNC
SPLMAN

4. The message shown below which is displayed during the process will disappear. When the display has returned to
the original state, remove the USB flash drive.

Executing...

5. Start the host machine, enter service mode, and then check that the setting information is reflected.
This completes the procedure for importing a setting information file.

■ Backup Procedure to the Storage in the Machine


Use the service mode function to back up the service mode setting information to the storage in the machine.

60
3. Technical Explanation (System)

This operation can be performed both from the Control Panel and remote UI.
The setting information that can be saved in the machine's storage is only one.

1. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode:


Access service mode, select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > SAVE-SM, and click [OK (EXEC)].

SERVICE MODE
COPIER DISPLAY
IO CCD
FEEDER CLEAR PANEL-UP
ADJUST LOGWRITE
FAX FUNCTION MISC-R
TESTMODE OPTION MISC-P IMPORT
SYSTEM EXPORT
COUNTER
VIFFNC SAVE-SM
SPLMAN RSTR-SM
LOG2USB

2. The following screen is displayed during the processing:

Executing...

3. Finish the operation after checking that the screen returns to the previous display.

■ Procedure for Restoration from Internal Storage


Restore the service mode setting information that has been backed up to the storage in the machine in the previous procedure.

1. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSTR-SM

SERVICE MODE
COPIER DISPLAY
IO CCD
FEEDER CLEAR PANEL-UP
ADJUST LOGWRITE
FAX FUNCTION MISC-R
TESTMODE OPTION MISC-P IMPORT
SYSTEM EXPORT
COUNTER
VIFFNC SAVE-SM
SPLMAN RSTR-SM
LOG2USB

2. The following screen is displayed during the processing:

Executing...

3. The operation is complete after checking that the screen returns to the previous display.

List of Items Which Can Be Imported


The following shows the items to be imported for this model.
Note that the setting values are not imported in cases such as below:
• Items which are originally not included in a DCM file (e.g.:"Settings/Registration Basic Information" of a DCM file exported
using service mode)

61
3. Technical Explanation (System)

• Not included in the import coverage (Cases A to C)


• There are no options and functions related to setting values
The import coverage shown in the table below is as shown below. Those that are not described here cannot be imported.

Import coverage Description


Case A: The same machine Import to the same machine (for backup and restoration, etc.)
Case B: The same model Import to a different machine of the same model (the same series)
Case C: Different model Import to a different machine of a different model (a different series)

■ Service Mode
Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MF Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL14159 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL65677 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL68676 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL68677 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL25607 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL93822 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL78788 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL71100*1 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL00171 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL80100 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL84194 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL ERDS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-PORT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MIBCOUNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-CMD5 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-PLN Yes - -
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-LGN Yes - -
COPIER OPTION BODY SLPMODE Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SDTM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW LCDSFLG Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRG-PROC Yes Yes -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRGLF-K Yes Yes -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW CRGLW-LV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON REGM-SEL Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER1 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER2 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER3 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER4 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER5 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER6 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-SW Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER CTCHKDSP Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER TNRB-SW Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER SCALL-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SMD-EXPT Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER ACC-SLP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION ACC CARD-SW Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

62
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C


COPIER OPTION ACC CC-SPSW Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW01 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW02 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW03 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW04 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW05 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW06 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW07 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW08 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW09 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW10 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW11 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW12 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW13 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW14 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW15 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW16 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW17 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW18 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW19 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW20 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW21 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW22 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW23 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW24 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW25 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW26 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW27 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW28 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW29 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW30 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW31 *1 - Yes - -
FAX SSSW SW32 *1 - Yes - -
FAX MENU 005 *1 - Yes - -
FAX MENU 006 *1 - Yes - -
FAX MENU 007 *1 - Yes - -
FAX MENU 008 *1 - Yes - -
FAX MENU 009 *1 - Yes - -
FAX MENU 010 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 002 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 003 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 004 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 005 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 006 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 008 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 010 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 011 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 012 *1 - Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

63
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C


FAX NUM 013 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 015 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 016 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 017 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 018 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 019 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 020 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 021 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 022 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 023 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 024 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 025 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 026 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 027 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 029 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 049 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 051 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 053 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NUM 054 *1 - Yes - -
FAX NCU TONE 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU TONE 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PULSE FORM *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PULSE 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PULSE 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PULSE 003 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PULSE 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE BIT *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE 003 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU DIALTONE 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 3rd DLTN BIT *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 4th DLTN 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 5th DLTN 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 6th DLTN 003 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 7th DLTN 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 8th DLTN 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 9th DLTN 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 10th DLTN 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU 11th DLTN 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE1 BIT *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE2 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE3 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE4 003 *1 Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

64
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C


FAX NCU BUSTONE5 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE6 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE7 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE8 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE9 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE2 BIT *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE3 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE4 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE5 003 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE6 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE7 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE8 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE9 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU BUSTONE10 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN BIT *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN 003 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU REORDRTN 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 003 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU AUTO RX 009 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU CNGDTCT 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU CNGDTCT 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU CNGDTCT 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU CNGDTCT 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU CNGDTCT 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU CNGDTCT 009 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU CNGDTCT 011 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU CNGDTCT 012 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW01 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW02 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW03 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW04 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW05 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW06 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW07 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW08 *1 Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

65
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C


FAX NCU SPECIALB SW09 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW10 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW11 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW12 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW13 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW14 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW15 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW16 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW17 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW18 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW19 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW20 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW21 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW22 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW23 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW24 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW25 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW26 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW27 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW28 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW29 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALB SW30 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 009 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 011 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 012 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 013 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 014 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 015 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 016 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 017 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 019 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 020 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 024 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 025 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 026 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 027 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 030 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 040 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 041 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 042 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 044 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 045 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 046 *1 Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

66
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C


FAX NCU SPECIALN 047 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 048 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 065 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU SPECIALN 066 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU RKEY 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU RKEY 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT BIT *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT 003 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXDIALT 008 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT BIT *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 001 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 002 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 003 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 004 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 005 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 006 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 007 *1 Yes - -
FAX NCU PBXBUSYT 008 *1 Yes - -

■ [Setting/Registration] menu
● System Management Settings
System Management Settings

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case


C
System Manager Information Settings
System Manager ID Up to 7 digits Yes Yes Yes
System Manager PIN Set (7 digits) Yes Yes Yes
System Manager Name 32 characters Yes Yes Yes
Contact Information 32 characters Yes Yes Yes
E-mail Address 64 characters Yes Yes Yes
System Manager Comment 32 characters Yes Yes Yes
Device Information Settings
Device Name 32 characters; Model name is displayed Yes
as an initial value
Location 32 characters Yes
Support Link 128 characters Yes Yes Yes
Information for Purchasing Consumables
Purchase From 32 characters Yes Yes Yes
E-mail Address 64 characters Yes Yes Yes
URL 256 characters Yes Yes Yes
Display Consumables Purchase Button On/Off Yes Yes Yes
Toner Status Settings

*1. FAX model only

67
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case


C
Use Toner Status On/Off Yes Yes Yes
Display Consumables Purchase Button On/Off Yes Yes Yes

Department ID Management
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case Case B Case C


A
Department ID Management (not displayed for models with- Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
out N/W)
Register New Department (can be set from remote UI) Yes Yes Yes
Department ID Up to 7 digits Yes Yes Yes
Set PIN 7 digits Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Functions
Black & White Copy Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Black & White Print Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Scan Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Fax Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs (can be set from Allow*/Reject Yes Yes Yes
remote UI)
Allow Scan Jobs W/ Unknown IDs (can be set from re- Allow*/Reject Yes Yes Yes
mote UI)

Network Settings
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case Case C


B
TCP/IP settings
IPv4 Settings
Auto Acquire Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
AutoIP Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Select Protocol DHCP*/BOOTP/RARP/OFF Yes Yes Yes
IP Address IP address 0.0.0.0* Yes
Subnet Mask IP address 0.0.0.0* Yes Yes Yes
Gateway Address IP address 0.0.0.0* Yes Yes Yes
DNS Settings
Primary DNS Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes
Secondary DNS Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Host Name Enter the host name Yes
Domain Name Enter the domain name Yes
DNS Dynamic Update Settings Yes Yes Yes
DNS Dynamic Update Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
DNS Dynamic Update Interval 0 to 48 hr. (*24 hr.) Yes Yes Yes
mDNS Settings
mDNS Settings Off/On* Yes
mDNS Name mDNS name entryt Yes
DHCP Option Settings
Acquire Host Name (option12) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
DNS Dynamic Update (option81) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Acquire DNS Server Address (option6) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Acquire Domain Name (option15) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

68
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case Case C


B
Acquire WINS Server Address (op- Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
tion44)
Acquire SMTP Server Address (op- Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
tion69)
Acquire POP3 Server Address (op- Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
tion70)
IPv6 Settings
Use IPv6
Use IPv6 Off*/On The Link-Local Address is displayed Yes Yes Yes
Stateless Address Settings
Use Stateless Address Off/On* The Stateless Address and the Prefix Yes Yes Yes
Length are displayed (max 6 addresses)
Manual Address Settings
Use Manual Address Off*/On Yes
Manual Address IP address entry screen Yes
Prefix Length (0 to *64 to 128) Yes
Default Router Address Router address entry screen Yes
Use DHCPv6
Use DHCPv6 Off*/OnThe Stateful Address and the Prefix Length Yes Yes Yes
are displayed.
DNS Settings
DNS Server Settings Yes Yes Yes
Primary DNS Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes
Secondary DNS Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings Yes
Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as Off/On* Yes
IPv4
Host Name Enter the host name Yes
Domain Name Enter the domain name Yes
DNS Dynamic Update Settings Yes Yes Yes
DNS Dynamic Update Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Register Manual Address Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Register Stateful Address Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Register Stateless Address Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
DNS Dynamic Update Interval 0 to 48 hr. (*24 hr.) Yes Yes Yes
mDNS Settings
mDNS Settings Off/On* Yes
Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4 Off/On* Yes
mDNS Name Enter the mDNS name Yes
DHCPv6 Option Settings
Acquire DNS Server Address (option23) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Acquire Domain Name (option24) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
WINS Settings
WINS Resolution Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
WINS Server Address WINS server's IP address (only in the case of WINS Yes Yes Yes
resolution) Initial value: 0.0.0.0
LPD Settings
LPD Print Settings Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Period Before Timeout 1 to 60 (*5) Yes Yes Yes
RAW Settings
RAW Print Settings Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Period Before Timeout 1 to 60 (*5) Yes Yes Yes
RAW Settings
WSD Print Settings

69
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case Case C


B
Use WSD Print Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Use WSD Browsing Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
WSD Scan Settings
Use WSD Scan Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Use Computer Scan Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Use Multicast Discovery Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Use FTP PASV Mode Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Use HTTP Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Port Number Settings
LPD 1 to 65535 ( *515 ) Yes Yes Yes
RAW 1 to 65535 ( *9100 ) Yes Yes Yes
HTTP 1 to 65535 ( *80 ) Yes Yes Yes
POP3 1 to 65535 ( *110 ) Yes Yes Yes
FTP 1 to 65535 ( *21 ) Yes Yes Yes
SMTP 1 to 65535 ( *25 ) Yes Yes Yes
SNMP 1 to 65535 ( *161 ) Yes Yes Yes
WSD Multicast Discovery 1 to 65535 ( *3702 ) Yes Yes Yes
Multicast Discovery 1 to 65535 ( *427 ) Yes Yes Yes
MTU Size 1300/1400/*1500 Yes Yes Yes
IPP Print Settings
Use IPP Printing Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Use TLS Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Network Link Scan Settings
Use Network Link Scan Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
SNTP Settings
Use SNTP Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Polling Interval 1 to 48 ( *24 ) Yes Yes Yes
NTP Server Address (up to 255 characters) *NULL Yes Yes Yes
Multicast Discovery Settings
Respond to Discovery Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Scope Name (up to 32 characters) *default Yes Yes Yes
Sleep Mode Notification Settings
Sleep Mode Notification Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Port Number 1 to 65535 ( *11427 ) Yes Yes Yes
Number of Routers to Traverse 0 to 254 ( *3 ) Yes Yes Yes
Notification Interval 60 to 65535 ( *600 ) Yes Yes Yes
Proxy Settings
Use Proxy Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
HTTP Proxy Server Address IP address or character strings (max. 128 bytes+ Yes Yes Yes
Null)
HTTP Proxy Server Port Number 1 to 65535 80* Yes Yes Yes
Use Proxy within Same Domain Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Use Proxy Authentication Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
User Name (up to 24characters) Yes Yes Yes
Password (up to 24characters) Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
SMTP Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes
E-mail Address Enter an e-mail address (max. 120 bytes) Yes Yes Yes
POP Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes
User Name Enter a user name Yes Yes Yes
Password Enter a password Yes Yes Yes
POP RX Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Pop Interval * up to 99 (0=Off) Yes Yes Yes

70
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case Case C


B
Authentication/Encryption Settings
Use POP Auth. Before Sending Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
APOP Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
SMTP Authentication Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
User Name Enter a user name Yes Yes Yes
Allow TLS (SMTP) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Verify Certificate On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Verify CN On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Allow TLS (POP) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Verify Certificate On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Verify CN On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
SMB Settings
NetBIOS Name NetBIOS name of own machine (15 bytes) Yes
Workgroup Name Workgroup name (15 bytes) to which the user be- Yes
longs
SNMP Settings
SNMPv1 Settings
Use SNMPv1 Settings Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Use Community Name 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Community Name 1 Character strings; Public* Yes Yes Yes
Use Community Name 2 Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Community Name 2 Character strings Yes Yes Yes
MIB Access Permission 1 Read Only*/Read/Write Yes Yes Yes
MIB Access Permission 2 Read Only*/Read/Write Yes Yes Yes
Use Dedicated Community Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Dedicated Community Settings RW/RO*/Off; The value of DB: RW (0x00)/ Yes Yes Yes
RO(0x01)/Off(0x02)
SNMPv3 Settings
Use SNMPv3 Settings Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Context Settings
Acquire Printer Management Information from Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Host
AirPrint Settings
Use AirPrint Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Printer Name Enter the mDNS name Yes
Location 32 characters Yes
Latitude N*/S, 0* to 90°, 0* to 59′, 0* to 59.999″ Yes
Longitude E*/W, 0* to 180°, 0* to 59′, 0* to 59.999″ Yes
Mopria Settings
Use Mopria Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Dedicated Port Settings
Dedicated Port Settings Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Waiting Time for Connection at Startup (0 to 300) sec *0 sec (NCA) Yes Yes Yes
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Communication Mode Half Duplex*/Full Duplex Yes Yes Yes
Ethernet Type 10 Base-T*/100 Base-TX /1000 Base-T Yes Yes Yes
Wireless LAN Settings
Wireless LAN Manual Settings
SSID Settings
SSID Manual Settings Character strings (ASCII: 1 to 32 characters) Yes Yes Yes
Securety Settings
Security WPA/WPA2 PSK*/WEP/None Yes Yes Yes
WPA/WPA2 PSK Settings

71
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case Case C


B
WPA/WPA2 Encryption Method Auto (AES-CCMP or TKIP) */ AES-CCMP Yes Yes Yes
Entry Format ASCII (8 to 63 characters)/ Hex number (64 digits) Yes Yes Yes
WPA/WPA2 PSK Character strings (ASCII: 8 to 63 characters, Hex Yes Yes Yes
number: 64 digits)
WE Settings
WEP Key Length 40bit WEP key* / 104bit WEP key Yes Yes Yes
Entry Format 40-bit ASCII (5 characters)/104-bit ASCII (13 char- Yes Yes Yes
acters)/40-bit hex number (10 digits)//104-bit hex
number (26 digits)
WEP Key 1 Character strings (ASCII: 5 characters/13 charac- Yes Yes Yes
ters, Hex number: 10 digits/26 digits)
WEP Key 2 Character strings (ASCII: 5 characters/13 charac- Yes Yes Yes
ters, Hex number: 10 digits/26 digits)
WEP Key 3 Character strings (ASCII: 5 characters/13 charac- Yes Yes Yes
ters, Hex number: 10 digits/26 digits)
WEP Key 4 Character strings (ASCII: 5 characters/13 charac- Yes Yes Yes
ters, Hex number: 10 digits/26 digits)
Select WEP Key 1 to 4 (*1) Yes Yes Yes
802.11 Authentication Open System*/Shared Key Yes Yes Yes
Power Save Mode
Power Save Mode On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Select Wired/Wireless LAN
Select Wired/Wireless LAN Wired LAN*/Wireless LAN Yes Yes Yes
Settings for Device Settings Management
Use Device Settings Management On*/Off Yes Yes Yes
Firmware Update Management Settings
Use TLS On*/Off Yes Yes Yes
L-CDS URL Character strings (512 bytes) ; Alphanumeric char- Yes Yes Yes
acters and the following symbols can be used: ; / ? :
@&=+$,-_.!~*()%#[]

Security Settings
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case Case Case C


A B
IPv4 Address Filter
Outbound Filter
Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes
Exception Addresses Up to 16 send exception IPv4 addresses Yes Yes Yes
Inbound Filter
Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes
Exception Addresses Up to 16 send exception IPv4 addresses Yes Yes Yes
IPv6 Address Filter
Outbound Filter
Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes
Exception Addresses Up to 16 send exception IPv6 addresses Yes Yes Yes
Inbound Filter
Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes
Exception Addresses Up to 16 send exception IPv6 addresses Yes Yes Yes
MAC Address Filter

72
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case Case Case C


A B
Outbound Filter
Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes
Exception Addresses Up to 32 MAC addresses Yes Yes Yes
Inbound Filter
Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes
Exception Addresses Up to 32 MAC addresses Yes Yes Yes

Restrict TX Function
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Address Book PIN 7 digits Yes Yes Yes
Restrict New Destinations Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Sending from Log Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Confirmation Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

Register LDAP Server


The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Register New LDAP Server (For Search)
Server Name Character strings (UTF-8 in 24 characters, max. 96 bytes) Yes Yes Yes
Server Address IP address or character strings (47 bytes) Yes Yes Yes
Position to Start Search Specify the part of the tree of the directory server where search Yes Yes Yes
is started (120bytes)
Port Number The communication port number of LDAP used by the LDAP Yes Yes Yes
server (1 to 65535); Initial value: 389
Search Timeout Response time from the LDAP server (30 to 300 sec); Initial val- Yes Yes Yes
ue: 60
Login Information Do Not Use*/Use/Use (Security Authentication) Yes Yes Yes
User Name User name that can be authenticated for LADP server (120 Yes Yes Yes
bytes)
Domain Name 120byte Yes Yes Yes
Display Authentication Screen On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
When Searching
Use Auth. Info. at Send Start On*/Off Yes Yes Yes
Register New LDAP Server (For Authentication)
Server Name Character strings (UTF-8 in 24 characters, max. 96 bytes) Yes Yes Yes
Server Address IP address or character strings (47 bytes) Yes Yes Yes
Position to Start Search Specify the part of the tree of the directory server where search Yes Yes Yes
is started (120bytes).
Port Number The communication port number of LDAP used by the LDAP Yes Yes Yes
server (1 to 65535); Initial value: 389
Auth/Attrib Acquisition Timeout Response time from the LDAP server (15 to 150 sec); Initial val- Yes Yes Yes
ue: 30
User Name Attribute Attribute name used to obtain the user name from the authenti- Yes Yes Yes
cation server (64 bytes)
E-Mail Address Attribute Attribute name used to obtain the e-mail address from the au- Yes Yes Yes
thentication server (64 bytes)
Login Information Use*/Use (Security Authentication) Yes Yes Yes
Use System Manager ID On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
User Name name that can be authenticated for LADP server (120 bytes) Yes Yes Yes
Domain Name 120byte Yes Yes Yes

73
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Authentication Settings for Send Function


The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Display Authentication Screen When Sending Operation On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Starts
Display Confirmation Screen When Logging Out On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail/I-Fax Sending Settings
E-Mail/I-Fax Sending: Do Not Allow/Allow*/Only Allow Sending Yes Yes Yes
to Myself
Authentication Method Display the authentication screen using Yes Yes Yes
the same user name as when the sending
operation started/Display the authentica-
tion screen without any authentication in-
formation/Use device-specific authenti-
cation information and do not display the
authentication screen*
Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender On*/Off Yes Yes Yes
File Sending Settings
File Sending Do Not Allow/Allow*/Only Allow Sending Yes Yes Yes
to Myself or Specified Folder
When Sending File to Destination Registered in Address Book
Authentication Method Display the authentication screen using Yes Yes Yes
the same authentication information as
when the sending operation started/
Display the authentication screen without
any authentication information/Use the
authentication information from the ad-
dress book and do not display the au-
thentication screen*
When Sending File to Myself
Authentication Method Use Same Authentication Information as Yes Yes Yes
When Send Operation Started/Display
the authentication screen without any au-
thentication information
Display Authentication Screen On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Specify Destination Folder On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Host Name 120byte Yes Yes Yes
Folder Path 120byte Yes Yes Yes
Add User Name On*/Off Yes Yes Yes
Fax Sending Settings
Fax Sending Do Not Allow/Allow* Yes Yes Yes

Others
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Display Job Log
(Display Job Log) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
USB Device Settings
(Use as USB Device) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Memory Media Settings
(Store to Memory Media) <Dealer machines> Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
<Shop machines> Off/On*
Memory Media PrintF
(Memory Media Print) <Dealer machines> Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
<Shop machines> Off/On*
Enable Product Extended Survey Program
( Use Product Extended Survey Program ) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Canon Mobile Scanning

74
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


( Canon Mobile Scanning) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Notify to Check Paper Settings
(Notify to Check Paper Settings) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Secure Print Settings
Secure Print Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Secure Print Deletion Time 10 to 240 min (Default: 30 min) Yes Yes Yes
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)
USB - Yes Yes

● Other than System Management Settings


Preferences
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case Case Case C


A B
Sound Volume Control
Fax Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes
Ring Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes
TX Done Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* /Only When Error Occurs (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes
RX Done Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* /Only When Error Occurs (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes
Scanning Done Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* /Only When Error Occurs (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes
Entry Tone Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Invalid Entry Tone Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Restock Supplies Tone Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Warning Tone Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Job Done Tone Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Energy Saver Alert Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Original in Feeder Detection Tone Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Display Settings
Default Screen after Startup/Restora- Home*1 /Copy*2 / Scan / Fax / Memory Media Print / Status Monitor/ Yes Yes Yes
tion Cancel
Language Select the display language Yes Yes Yes
Remote UI Language Select the display language Yes Yes Yes
Brightness -4 to 0* Yes Yes Yes
Invert Screen Colors Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Millimeter/Inch Entry Millimeter*/Inch (* Inch: Only when the country/region is set to USA) Yes Yes Yes
Gram/Pound Switch Gram/Pound* Yes Yes Yes
Message Display Time 1-5 2* Yes Yes Yes
Scrolling Speed Slow/Standard*/Fast Yes Yes Yes
Cursor Movement Auto*/Manual Yes Yes Yes
English Keyboard Layout USA Layout/UK Layout Yes Yes Yes

Timer Settings
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case Case Case


A B C
Date/Time Settings Time zone
Date Format "MM/DD/YYYY","DD/MM YYYY","YYYY MM/DD" Yes Yes Yes
Time Format 12 Hour (AM/PM) / 24 Hour Yes Yes Yes
Time Zone UTC-12:00 to UTC+14:00+City name Yes Yes
Daylight Saving Time Off*/On, When On: Start, End Yes Yes Yes

*1. Not displayed on models without Touch Panel.


*2. Default of models without Touch Panel.

75
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case Case Case


A B C
Start Month/Week/Day Yes Yes Yes
End Month/Week/Day Yes Yes Yes
Auto Sleep Time xxx to xxx min Default: xxx Yes Yes Yes
Auto Reset Time 0=None, 1...2*...9 min. (1-minute increment) Yes Yes Yes
Function After Auto Reset Default Function*/Selected Function Yes Yes Yes
Auto Offline Time 0=None, 1 to 60 min. (1-minute increment) Default: 5 Yes Yes Yes
Auto Shutdown Time 0=None, 1 to 8 hours (1-hour increment) Default: 4 (Europe), 0 Yes Yes Yes
(Other than Europe)

Common Settings
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case Case C


B
Paper Drawer Auto Selection Copy/Printer/RX or Fax/Other (Multi-Purpose Tray:*Off/On + Each Cassette:*Off/On)
Copy
Multi-purpose Tray Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 2 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Printer
Drawer 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 2 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Fax/Receive (Fax for Fax-only models, Receive for others)
Multi-purpose Tray Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 2 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Other
Multi-purpose Tray Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 2 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Switch Paper Feed Method
Multi-purpose Tray Speed Priority*/Print Side Priority Yes Yes
Drawer 1 Speed Priority*/Print Side Priority Yes Yes
Drawer 2 Speed Priority*/Print Side Priority Yes Yes

Copy Settings

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes

Fax Settings
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Basic Settings
Unit Telephone Number
Telephone number Max. 20 digits Yes Yes
Select Line Type Auto/Manual* Yes Yes Yes
Manual 120V, 230V: Tone*/Pulse(10PPS); 100V: Dial 20 PPS/ Yes Yes Yes
Dial 10 PPS/Tone*
Off-Hook Alarm Off*/On (1-3) Yes Yes Yes
Communication Management Settings
TX Start Speed 33600*/14400/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Yes Yes Yes
RX Start Speed 33600*/14400/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Yes Yes Yes
R-Key Setting PSTN*/PBX Yes Yes Yes

76
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


PBX HOOKING/PREFIX Yes Yes Yes
Prefix Code > Prefix Code Yes Yes Yes
TX Function Settings
Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Resolution standard*/fine/photo/sfine/ufine Yes Yes Yes
Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Register Unit Name (Fax) Enter the unit name Yes Yes Yes
ECM TX Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Set Pause Time 1 to 15(sec)/4 to 11(sec)/3 to 6(sec) (2*) Yes Yes Yes
Auto Redial Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Number of Times to Redial 1-N Yes Yes Yes
Redial Interval (min) 2-99(2*) Yes Yes Yes
Redial When Err Occurs Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Add TX Terminal ID Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Print Position Inside Image Area/Outside Image Area* Yes Yes Yes
Mark Number as: TEL/FAX FAX*/TEL Yes Yes Yes
Check Dial Tone Before Sending Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Number Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Sequential Broadcast Confirm Sequential Broadcast/Reject Sequential Broad- Yes Yes Yes
cast/Off*
RX Function Settings
ECM RX Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Use Incoming Ring Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Number of Rings 1 to N times *2 times Yes Yes Yes
Remote RX Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Remote RX ID (Remote RX ID: 00 to 99, 25*) Yes Yes Yes
Switch to Auto RX Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Ring Time Until Auto RX 1 to 99 sec *15 sec Yes Yes Yes
Memory Lock Setting
PIN Register a PIN (7 digits) Yes Yes Yes
Use Memory Lock Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Print Report Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Specify Memory Lock Time On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Memory Lock Start Time (hr.) Set the time Yes Yes Yes
Memory Lock Start Time (min.) Set the time Yes Yes Yes
Memory Lock End Time (hr.) Set the time Yes Yes Yes
Memory Lock End Time (min.) Set the time Yes Yes Yes
RX Print Settings
Print on Both Sides Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Reduce RX Size Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Reduction Mode Auto*/Fixed Yes Yes Yes
Reduction Ratio 97/95/90*/75(%) Yes Yes Yes
Reduction Direction Vertical/Horizontal / Vertical Only* Yes Yes Yes
Add RX Page Footer Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Use K-Paper Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Continue Printing When Amount in Car- Off/On Yes Yes Yes
tridge Is Low
Forwarding Settings
Print Images Off / Only When Error Occurs / On* Yes Yes Yes
Store Images in Memory Do Not Store* / Only When Error Occurs Yes Yes Yes

77
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Scan Settings
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


USB Memory Settings
Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes
Scan Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes Yes Yes Yes
Color Mode Color*/Black & White Yes Yes Yes
File Format PDF (Compact)/PDF*/PDF (Compact/OCR)/PDF Yes Yes Yes
(OCR)/JPEG/TIFF
Encrypted PDF None*/Acrobat7.0 or later/Acrobat9.0 or equivalent/Acro- Yes Yes Yes
bat10.0 or equivalent
Digital Signatures None*/OK Yes Yes Yes
Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Original Orientation Portrait*/Landscape Yes Yes Yes
Original Type Text/ Text/Photo* / Photo Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Data Size Memory Priority/Standard*/Image Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes
E-mail Settings
Register Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes
Scan Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes Yes Yes Yes
Color Mode Color*/Black & White Yes Yes Yes
File Format PDF (Compact)/PDF*/PDF (Compact/OCR)/PDF Yes Yes Yes
(OCR)/JPEG/TIFF
Encrypted PDF None*/Acrobat7.0 or later/Acrobat9.0 or equivalent/Acro- Yes Yes Yes
bat10.0 or equivalent
Digital Signatures None*/OK Yes Yes Yes
Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Original Orientation Portrait*/Landscape Yes Yes Yes
Original Type Text/ Text/Photo* / Photo Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Data size Memory Priority/Standard*/Image Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes
Subject Enter the subject Yes Yes Yes
Message Enter the message Yes Yes Yes
Reply-to Specify from Address Book... Yes Yes Yes
Priority Low/Standard*/High Yes Yes Yes
I-Fax Settings
TX Function Settings
Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes
Scan Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes Yes Yes Yes
Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Original Type Text*/ Text/Photo / Photo Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Subject Enter the subject Yes Yes Yes
Message Enter the message Yes Yes Yes
Reply-to Specify from Address Book... Yes Yes Yes
Add TX Terminal ID Off/On* Yes Yes Yes
Print Position Inside Image Area/Outside Image Area* Yes Yes Yes
RX Print Settings
Print on Both Sides Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
RX Print Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes. Default: AB Yes Yes Yes
configuration=>A4, AB/Inch configuration=>A4, Inch
configuration=>LTR

78
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Continue Printing When Off*/No Yes Yes Yes
Amount in Cartridge Is Low
File Settings
Change/Register Default Settings
File Register Yes Yes Yes
Scan Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes Yes Yes Yes
Color Mode Color*/Black & White Yes Yes Yes
File Format PDF (Compact)/PDF*/PDF (Compact/OCR)/PDF Yes Yes Yes
(OCR)/JPEG/TIFF
Encrypted PDF None*/Acrobat7.0 or later/Acrobat9.0 or equivalent/Acro- Yes Yes Yes
bat10.0 or equivalent
Digital Signatures None*/OK Yes Yes Yes
Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Original Orientation Portrait*/Landscape Yes Yes Yes
Original Type Text/ Text/Photo* / Photo Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes
Data size Memory Priority/Standard*/Image Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes
Common Settings
Unit Name (E-Mail/I-Fax) Enter the unit name Yes Yes Yes
Output File Image Settings
YCbCr Tx Gamma Value γ1.0/γ1.4/γ1.8*/γ2.2 Yes Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
Smart Scan Off/On* Yes Yes

Memory Media Print Settings


The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes
File Sort Default Settings Name (Ascending)*/Name (Descending), Date/Time (Ascend- Yes Yes Yes
ing) / Date/Time (Descending)
File Name Display Format Short File Name/Long File Name* Yes Yes Yes
Default Display Settings Details*/Images Yes Yes Yes

Printer Settings
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting Setting description Case A Case B Case C


items
Custom Settings
Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing Yes Yes Yes
Multi-purpose *Off/On Yes Yes Yes
Tray *Force Output/Display Error (displayed only when set to On) Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 1 *Off/On Yes Yes Yes
*Force Output/Display Error (displayed only when set to On) Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 2 *Off/On Yes Yes Yes
*Force Output/Display Error (displayed only when set to On) Yes Yes Yes
Drawer 3 *Off/On Yes Yes Yes
*Force Output/Display Error (displayed only when set to On) Yes Yes Yes
Copies 1* to 99 Yes Yes Yes
2-Sided Printing Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Paper Yes Yes
Default Paper - Yes Yes
Size

79
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting Setting description Case A Case B Case C


items
Default Paper - Yes Yes
Type
Paper Size Over- Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
ride
Print Quality Yes Yes Yes
Density -8 to +8 0* Yes Yes Yes
Fine Adjust High: -8 to +8 0* Yes Yes Yes
Medium: -8 to +8 0* Yes Yes Yes
Low: -8 to +8 0* Yes Yes Yes
Toner Save Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Resolution 600dpi*/1200dpi Yes Yes Yes
Barcode Ad- Off*/Mode 1/Mode 2/Mode 3 Yes Yes Yes
justment Mode
Layout
Binding Loca- Long Edge*/Short Edge Yes Yes Yes
tion
Gutter mm/in; For mm:-50.0 to 50.0, Default: 0, in 0.5-mm increment; For inch: Yes Yes Yes
-1.90 to 1.90, Default: 0, in 0.01-inch increment
Offset Short mm/in; For mm:-50.0 to 50.0, Default: 0, in 0.5-mm increment; For inch: Yes Yes Yes
Edge (Front) -2.00 to 2.00, Default: 0, in 0.01-inch increment
Offset Long Same as above Yes Yes Yes
Edge (Front)
Offset Short Same as above Yes Yes Yes
Edge (Back)
Offset Long Same as above Yes Yes Yes
Edge (Back)
Auto Error Skip Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Timeout Timeout (Timeout: 5 to 300 sec) 15* Yes Yes Yes
Personality *Auto/PS/PCL/PDF/XPS Yes Yes Yes
LIPSLX or UFRII
Halftones
Text ColorResolution*/GradationBWResolution*/Color Tone/Gradation/High Yes Yes Yes
Resolution
Graphics ColorResolution/Gradation*BWResolution/Color Tone*/Gradation/High Yes Yes Yes
Resolution
Image ColorResolution/Gradation*BWResolution/Color Tone*/Gradation/High Yes Yes Yes
Resolution
PCL
Paper Save Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Orientation Vertical*/Portrait Yes Yes Yes
Font Number 0 to max. number of fonts Yes Yes Yes
Point Size Point : 4 to 999.75, Default: 12, in 0.25 increment; The value multiplied by Yes Yes Yes
100 is retained as an internal value
Pitch cpi : 0.44 to 99.99, Default: 10, in 0.01 increment; The value multiplied by Yes Yes Yes
100 is retained as an internal value
Form Lines Line: 5 to 128, Default: 60 (US), 64 (other than US) Yes Yes Yes
Character Code Default PC8 Yes Yes Yes
Set Custom Paper Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Unit of Measure For countries other than US: Millimeters*/Inch; For US; Millimeters/Inch* Yes Yes Yes
X dimension - Yes Yes Yes
Y dimension - Yes Yes Yes
Append CR to LF Yes/No* Yes Yes Yes
Enlarge A4 Print Off*/On Yes Yes Yes
Width
Halftones

80
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting Setting description Case A Case B Case C


items
Text Color:Resolution*/GradationBW:Resolution*/Color Tone/Gradation/High Yes Yes Yes
Resolution
Graphics Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution/Color Tone*/Gradation/High Yes Yes Yes
Resolution
Image Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution/Color Tone*/Gradation/High Yes Yes Yes
Resolution
BarDIMM Disable*/Enable Yes Yes Yes
FreeScape Off, ~, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, | Initial value~ Yes Yes Yes
PS
Job timeout 0 to 3600[sec], Default: 0[sec] Yes Yes Yes
Print PS Error On/Off* Yes Yes Yes
Halftones
Text Color:Resolution*/GradationBW:Resolution*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Graphics Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Image Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Grayscale Con- sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes
version
PDF
Enlarge/Reduce to On/*Off Yes Yes Yes
Fit Size
Enlarge Print Area On/*Off Yes Yes Yes
N on 1 *Off/2 on 1/4 on 1/6 on 1/8 on 1/9 on 1/16 on 1 Yes Yes Yes
Comment Print Off/Auto* Yes Yes Yes
Halftones
Text Color:Resolution*/GradationBW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Graphics Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Image Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Grayscale Con- sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes
version
XPS
Halftones
Text Color:Resolution*/GradationBW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Graphics Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Image Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes
Grayscale Conversion
Text sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes
Graphics sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes
Image sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes
Compressed Im- Output*/Display Error Yes Yes Yes
age Output
Imaging
Halftones Error Diffusion/Gradation* Yes Yes Yes

Adjustment/Maintenance
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Printer Density -4 to +4 0* Yes Yes
Toner Saver Mode Off*/On Yes Yes
Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation
Auto Yes Yes
Custom 1%-99%, *20% Yes Yes
Special Processing
Special Mode A Off/MODE1*/MODE2/MODE3/MODE4 Yes Yes
Special Mode U Off*/On Yes Yes

81
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Special Mode V Off*/MODE1/MODE2 Yes Yes
Special Mode Z Off/MODE1*/MODE2/MODE3 Yes Yes
Special Mode B Off*/MODE1/MODE2/MODE3 Yes Yes
Special Mode C Off*/On Yes Yes
Special Mode D Off*/On Yes Yes
Special Mode G Off*/On Yes Yes

Report Output
Displayed when Report key is pressed. Not displayed in the Settings/Registration menu.
The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values.

User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C


Output Report Settings
Fax TX Result Report Off / On / Only When Error Occurs* Yes Yes
TX Image Report Off/On* Yes Yes
E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report Off / On / Only When Error Occurs* Yes Yes
Communication Management Report
Auto Print After 40 Transmis- Off/On* Yes Yes
sions
Separate TX/RX Off*/On Yes Yes
RX Result Report Off* / On / Only When Error Occurs Yes Yes

● Common settings
User mode setting items Case A Case B Case C
Paper Settings
Multi-purpose Tray
Specify When Loading Paper Yes Yes
Paper Size Yes Yes
Paper Type Yes Yes
Drawer 1
Paper Size Yes Yes
Paper Type Yes Yes
Drawer 2
Paper Size Yes Yes
Paper Type Yes Yes
Register Custom Paper Yes Yes
Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes
Multi-purpose Tray Yes Yes
Drawer 1 Yes Yes
Drawer 2 Yes Yes
Address Book Settings (Model with FAX and/or SEND)
One-touch Dial
Fax Yes Yes Yes
Fax Number Yes Yes Yes
Name Yes Yes Yes
Set Details Yes Yes Yes
Long Distance Yes Yes Yes
TX Speed Yes Yes Yes
ECM TX Yes Yes Yes
E-mail
E-mail Address Yes Yes Yes
Name Yes Yes Yes
File: SMB
Host Name Yes Yes Yes

82
3. Technical Explanation (System)

User mode setting items Case A Case B Case C


Name Yes Yes Yes
Folder Path Yes Yes Yes
User Name Yes Yes Yes
Password Yes Yes Yes
File: FTP
Host Name Yes Yes Yes
Name Yes Yes Yes
Folder Path Yes Yes Yes
User Name Yes Yes Yes
Password Yes Yes Yes
I-Fax
I-Fax Address Yes Yes Yes
Name Yes Yes Yes

83
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)

Overview of System
■ Function Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the host machine. When the monitoring
option is enabled by making the setting on this machine, information such as the status change of the machine, counter
information, and failure information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance server called
UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis
System).
The following device information/ status can be monitored.
• Billing counts
• Parts counter
• Firmware info
• Service call error log
• Jam log
• Alarm log
• Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs communication between this machine and the
UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol.

Customer
UGW
Environment This machine

Internet
㻲㼕㼞㼑㼣㼍㼘㼘

Sales Company

DNS Server Proxy Server Administrator

■ Features
E-RDS is embedded in the network module of the device, and the front-end module of the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote
system is realized without requiring hardware besides the device.

■ Main Functions
Functional cat- Sub category Description
egory
Communication COM-TEST Execute service mode to communicate with the server, retrieve schedule information,
test and establish communication.
Transmission of Billing/all resources/parts/ Periodically send billing/all resources/parts/mode-by-mode counters to the server.
counters mode-by-mode counters
Transmission of Alerts Each time the status of the device is changed, the status information is sent to the
event logs server.
Service call/alarm/jam log Each time a service call, alarm, or jam log occurs, the error log is sent to the server.
Data transmis- ROM version Periodically send firmware information of the device.
sion Schedule Periodically send schedule information of the device.
Debug log Send debug information of E-RDS which exceeds a specific size to the server.
Sublog transmission Send data such as device Sublogs and DCON logs to the server.
Operation in- Operation check Contact the server to check if there is processing to be executed, and receive the
struction following instructions if any.
• Change the schedule
• Change the alarm level
• Change the alert filter

84
3. Technical Explanation (System)

Service cautions
• After clearing the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COMTEST)
need to be performed. Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
• The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
• Port number of UGW
[COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443
• If the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS :
0).
• When the E-RDS function is enabled, a communication test can be performed from [Check Counter] of the machine's Control
Panel. *1
When conducting a communication test from [Check Counter], pay attention to the following points:
• During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions are not accepted until the
communication test is completed (actions are ignored).
• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from [Check Counter], do not conduct a
communication test from the other. Such operation is not guaranteed.

Setting Procedure
■ Preparation
Since this function communicates with the UGW server, it is necessary to connect to the external network.
Check the following items, and make the settings if not yet set.
• IP address settings
• DNS server settings
• Proxy server settings*2
• Installation of CA certificate (arbitrary *3 )

CAUTION:
• Obtain the information on the network environment from the system administrator of the user.
• When having changed the network settings, turn OF and then ON the main power of the machine.

■ Procedure for Setting E-RDS


1. In the following service mode, select the following service mode to initialize the E-RDS setting values:
• COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT

NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of“Setting values and data to be initialized” on page 86 .

*1. The user can perform a communication test or browse the result of communication test.

Check Counter Monitoring Service Do you want to perform a


communication test ?
Check Device Configuration Communication Test

Yes No
Monitr. Serv.

If the communication results in failure, an error code (hexadecimal number, 8 digit) is displayed on the Control Panel.
*2. If authentication is necessary, make the settings of the authentication information as well.
*3. When using a certificate other than those pre-installed in the device

85
3. Technical Explanation (System)

2. Enable the E-RDS function in the following service mode, and perform a communication test.
1. Select the following item:
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [ERDS]
2. Enter [1] from the keyboard, and press [Apply].

CAUTION:
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.

When the E-RDS function is enabled, the function to communicate with UGW is enabled.

3. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [Yes].


If the communication is successful, "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, check the network settings and USW server
address (URL).

CAUTION:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM-LOG. By performing the communication
test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.

Maintenace
■ Initializing E-RDS settings
It is possible to clear the FLASH data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the default value.

● Initialization procedure
Follow the procedure shown below to initialize E-RDS.

1. Enter service mode as a system administrator user.

2. Select the following service mode, and press [OK] to execute.


• COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT

● Setting values and data to be initialized


The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [ERDS]
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
• [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG]

CAUTION:
If a certificate other than the CA certificate at the time of shipment has been installed, initializing the E-RDS setting will not
change the settings back to those at the time of shipment. To change the certificate back to the CA certificate at the time
of shipment, delete the certificate (install the CA certificate at the time of shipment) after initializing the E-RDS settings.
For the detailed procedure, refer to “Procedure for Setting E-RDS” on page 85.

■ Report Output of Communication Error Log (COM-LOG)


A report of communication error log information on five affairs can be output.

● Report output procedure


1. Select the following service mode, and press [Yes].
• [COPIER] > [Function] > [MISC-P] > [ERDS-LOG]

86
3. Technical Explanation (System)

12/09 2015 10:14AM


****************************
*** E-RDS-COM-LOG***
****************************
No.01 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
No.02 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 00000000
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
No.03 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:18 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
No.04 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:18 AM CODE 00000000
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
No.05 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 01:56 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.

Output sample

87
4 Periodical Service
Periodically Replaced Parts................ 89
Consumable Parts...............................90
Periodical Service............................... 91
Cleaning.............................................. 92
4. Periodical Service

Periodically Replaced Parts


No periodically replaced parts is set for this product.

89
4. Periodical Service

Consumable Parts

Parts name Product No. Q'ty Interval Remarks


ADF Separation Pad FC7-6297 1 50,000 sheets
ADF Separation Roller FL2-6637 1 50,000 sheets

90
4. Periodical Service

Periodical Service
No periodically service is set for this product.

91
4. Periodical Service

Cleaning

Component Cleaning method


Scanning Area Clean with Oil Glass Cleaner (FY9-6020) and lint-free paper.
Copy board glass Wipe With a Lint-free Cloth.
Cassette Pickup Roller
Transfer Guide Unit
Media Feed Belt And Media Feed Guide Unit
Fixing Inlet Guide

92
5 Disassembly/
Assembly
External Cover.................................... 94
Main Unit............................................. 95
Electrical Components Layout
Drawing........................................... 96
Connector Layout Drawing............... 100
External Cover.................................. 106
Document Exposure / Delivery
System...........................................114
Controller System..............................123
Laser Scanner System......................137
Image Forming System..................... 138
Fixing System....................................140
Pickup / Feed System....................... 142
5. Disassembly/Assembly

External Cover

[1] [2]

[7]
[3]
[8]
[9]
[4]

[10]

[6] [5] [12] [11]

[13]

[14]

[22]
[15]
[21]

HAND
SET

[16]
[17]
[20]
[19] [18]

Key Name Remarks Reference


[1] DADF “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114
[2] Document Feeder Tray
[3] Document Delivery Tray
[4] Control Panel “Removing the Control Panel” on page 129
[5] Right Cover Unit “Removing the Right Cover Unit” on page 108
[6] MP Pickup Tray
[7] Upper Cover “Removing the Upper Cover” on page 112
[8] USB Port 1
[9] Reader Unit “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114
[10] Front Cover “Removing the Front Cover Unit” on page 110
[11] Main Power Switch
[12] Paper Cassette
[13] USB Port 2
[14] Ethernet Port
[15] Left Cover Unit “Removing the Left Cover Unit” on page 106
[16] Handset Terminal
[17] External Telephone Terminal
[18] Telephone Line Terminal
[19] Left Rear Cover “Removing the Left Rear Cover” on page 107
[20] Power Socket
[21] Rear Lower Cover
[22] Rear Upper Cover

94
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Main Unit

[6]

[7]

[1]

[8]
[2]

[10]

[11]

[3]
[5]
[4]

[9]

Key Name Remarks Reference


[1] DADF Unit “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114
[2] Reader Unit “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114
[3] Fixing Assembly “Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 140
[4] Laser Scanner Unit “Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 137
[5] Registration Unit “Removing the Registration Unit” on page 138
[6] Duplex Drive Unit “Removing the Duplex Drive Unit” on page 134
[7] Main Drive Unit “Removing the Main Drive Unit ” on page 132
[8] Duplex Feed Unit “Removing the Duplex Feed Unit” on page 142
[9] Contact Image Sensor “Removing the CIS Unit” on page 121
[10] ADF Pickup Feed Unit “Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page 118
[11] Control Panel “Removing the Control Panel” on page 129

95
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Electrical Components Layout Drawing

Sensor

PS3

PS2

PS1
PS206

PS201 TAG

PS915 PS205

PS204 PS203

PS202

Symbol Name Remarks Reference


PS1 CIS HP Sensor
PS2 Document End Sensor
PS3 Document Sensor
PS201 Duplex Reverse Sensor
PS202 MP Tray Media Presence Sensor
PS203 Cassette Media Presence Sensor
PS204 Top Sensor
PS205 Media Width Sensor
PS206 FD Tray Media Full Sensor
PS915 Fixing Delivery Sensor
TAG Cartridge Sensor

96
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Motor/Fan

M4

M3

FM1/FM2

M2

M1

FM3

Symbol Name Remarks Reference


FM1 Main Fan Only for EUR “Removing the Main Fan” on page 132
FM2 Main Fan Other than EUR “Removing the Main Fan” on page 132
FM3 Controller Fan
M1 Main Motor “Removing the Main Motor ” on page 131
M2 Laser Scanner Motor
M3 Reader Motor
M4 ADF Motor “Removing the ADF Pickup Motor Unit” on page 119

97
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Other

SL4

TP1 SL2

TH1
SW1/SW11

H1

SW2

SL3
SP1 SL1

Symbol Name Remarks Reference


SL1 Cassette Pickup Sorenoid “Removing the Cassette Pickup
Solenoid” on page 136
SL2 Duplex Reverse Sorenoid “Removing the Duplex Reverse
Solenoid” on page 136
SL3 MP Tray Pickup Sorenoid
SL4 ADF Delivery Sorenoid “Removing the ADF Delivery Sol-
enoid Unit” on page 120
SP1 Speaker MF419x/ MF419dw
H1 Heater
TH1 Thermistor
TP1 Thermoswitch
SW1 Main Switch Other than EUR
SW11 Main Switch Only for EUR
SW2 Door Switch

98
5. Disassembly/Assembly

PCB

UNIT5

UNIT16

UNIT22

UNIT14

UNIT18
UNIT3
UNIT19
UNIT2
UNIT6
UNIT4
UNIT21

Symbol Name Remarks Reference


UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB “Removing the Engine Controller Unit ” on page
127
UNIT3 High Voltage Power Supply PCB
UNIT4 Low Voltage Power Supply PCB
UNIT5 Connecting PCB
UNIT6 Laser Driver PCB
UNIT14 Main Controller PCB “Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page
123
UNIT16 Control Panel PCB “Removing the Control Panel PCB” on page
130
UNIT18 NCU PCB MF419x/ “Removing the NCU PCB (MF419x/ MF419dw)”
MF419dw on page 124
UNIT19 OFF Hook PCB MF419x/ “Removing the OFF Hook PCB (MF419x/
MF419dw MF419dw)” on page 125
UNIT21 USB PCB
UNIT22 Wireless LAN PCB “Removing the Wireless LAN PCB ” on page
123

99
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Connector Layout Drawing

J1303
J1310 J1302
J1301 J1312

J16

J1103
J1502

J1501

J802
J801

J910

J911
J972

J928
J902
J904
J927
J926 J1501
J903 J923

J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- J No. Symbol Name Remarks


nector
J926 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1301 M4 ADF Motor
J926 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1303 J1303 SL4 ADF Delivery Sorenoid
J926 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1310 J1312 PS2 Document End Sensor
J926 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1302 PS3 Document Sensor
J927 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1501 J1501 M3 Scanner Motor
J927 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1502 PS1 CIS HP Sensor
J928 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J16 UNIT26 Contact Image Sensor
J1103 UNIT5 Connecting PCB J802 M2 Laser Scanner Motor
J902 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J801 UNIT6 Laser Driver PCB
J903 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J903 SL3 MP Tray Pickup Sorenoid
J923 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1501 J1501 FM3 Controller Fan
J904 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J972 UNIT21 USB PCB
J910 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB - - - USB
J911 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB - - - ETHERNET

100
5. Disassembly/Assembly

J908 J930
J1 J932
J931 J252
J901 J915
J251
J909

J945
J944
J943

J941
J256
J942 J270
J952 J271
J201 J257
J255
J951

J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- J No. Symbol Name Remarks


nector
J251 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB - SW2 Door Switch
J252 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB - SW2 Door Switch
J271 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J257 UNIT4 Low Voltage Power Supply
PCB
J270 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J256 UNIT3 High Voltage Power Supply
PCB
J915 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J255 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB
J901 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J201 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB
J930 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J941 UNIT18 NCU PCB MF419x/ MF419dw
J2001 UNIT19 OFF Hook PCB J942 UNIT18 NCU PCB MF419x/ MF419dw
J931 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J2000 UNIT19 OFF Hook PCB MF419x/ MF419dw
J932 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J932 SP1 Speaker MF419x/ MF419dw
J908 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1 UNIT22 Wireless LAN PCB
J909 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1 UNIT15 eMMC PCB
J943 UNIT18 NCU PCB - - - LINE MF419x/
MF419dw
J944 UNIT18 NCU PCB - - - TEL MF419x/
MF419dw
J945 UNIT18 NCU PCB - - - HANDSET MF419x/
MF419dw

101
5. Disassembly/Assembly

J407

J1101

J1102
J1104

J2100

J1205

J1202
J205 J203 J850 J211
J204 J206 J214 J207

J210 J213 J208 J202


J212

J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- J No. Symbol Name Remarks


nector
J211 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J1205 - - -
J214 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J214 TAG Cartridge Sensor
J2100 TAG Cartridge Sensor - - -
J208 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J208 PS201 Duplex Reverse Sensor
J205 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J205 PS202 MP Tray Media Presence Sen-
sor
J204 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J204 PS203 Cassette Media Presence Sen-
sor
J203 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J203 UNIT10 Top Sensor Unit PS204,PS205
J213 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J213 PS206 FD Tray Media Full Sensor
J202 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J1202 M1 Main Motor
J206 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J206 PS915 Fixing Delivery Sensor
J210 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J210 TH1 Thermistor
J212 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J407 H1 Heater
J207 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J1102 UNIT5 Connecting PCB
J1104 UNIT5 Connecting PCB J1104 SL1 Cassette Pickup Sorenoid
J1101 UNIT5 Connecting PCB J1101 SL2 Duplex Reverse Sorenoid

102
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Other than EUR

J805

J1105

J905

J209

J951

J906

J925

J953
J933 J954

J934 J905

J914
J1
J1

J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- J No. Symbol Name Remarks


nector
J1105 UNIT5 Connecting PCB J805 J805 FM2 Main Fan
J209 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB - SW1 Main Switch
- SW1 Main Switch J905 J905 J1 INLET
J925 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J951 UNIT16 Control Panel PCB
J953 UNIT16 Control Panel PCB J1 DSP1 LCD
J954 UNIT16 Control Panel PCB J1 UNIT27 Touch Panel
J906 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB P972 UNIT23 USB-HOST PCB
J905 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1 UNIT24 SOFT-ID PCB
J914 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1 UNIT25 COUNTER PCB
J933 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J28 - Copy Card Reader-F1
J934 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J934 - Copy Control Interface Kit-C1

103
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Only for EUR

J804
J10

J905

J209

J918

J850
J951

J906

J925

J953
J933 J954

J934 J905

J914
J1
J1

J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- J No. Symbol Name Remarks


nector
J850 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB J804 J804 FM1 Main Fan
J209 UNIT2 Engine Controller PCB - SW11 Main Switch
- SW11 Main Switch J905 J905 J1 INLET
J918 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J10 SW11 Main Switch
J925 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J951 UNIT16 Control Panel PCB
J953 UNIT16 Control Panel PCB J1 DSP1 LCD
J954 UNIT16 Control Panel PCB J1 UNIT27 Touch Panel
J906 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB P972 UNIT23 USB-HOST PCB
J905 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1 UNIT24 SOFT-ID PCB
J914 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J1 UNIT25 COUNTER PCB
J933 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J28 - Copy Card Reader-F1

104
5. Disassembly/Assembly

J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- J No. Symbol Name Remarks


nector
J934 UNIT14 Main Controller PCB J934 - Copy Control Interface Kit-C1

105
5. Disassembly/Assembly

4. Place the host machine [1] while shifting its left side
External Cover approx. 10cm from the working table to release the
claw on the lower side of the Left Cover Unit.

Removing the Left Cover Unit CAUTION:


Be careful not to drop the host machine when shifting
■ Procedure it.

1. Remove the cassette [1].

2. Press the Open button [2], and open the Front Cover
Unit [3].

[1]
[2]

[3]

100 mm
[1]

5. Release the claw [1].

3. Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1]. 1x

[1]

[1]

106
5. Disassembly/Assembly

6. While opening the Left Cover Unit [1] in the direction 8. Remove the Left Cover Unit [1] in the direction of the
of the arrow, release the 2 claws [2] on the lower arrow.
side.

[1]

2x Removing the Left Rear Cover


[2] ■ Preparation
[2] 1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

■ Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the claw [1], and remove the Arm Cover [2].

7. Release the claw [2], and pull the Left Cover Unit [1]
in the direction of the arrow.

[2]
1x

[1] [2]

[1]

2. Disconnect the arm [1], and turn it toward the rear.

CAUTION:
When opening/closing the ADF + Reader Unit after
releasing the arm, be sure to perform the work while
supporting the ADF + Reader Unit. Be careful not to get
your hand caught.

107
5. Disassembly/Assembly

4. Lift the host machine [1], and remove the Left Rear
Cover [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
• 2 Claws [4]
[1]

1x

[1] [3] [2]

3. Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1], and release the 2


Claws [2].
[4]
[1]

Removing the Right Cover


Unit
■ Procedure
1. Remove the cassette [1].

2. Press the Open button [2], and open the Front Cover
Unit [3].

2x
[2]

[2] [3]

[2]
[1]

108
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1].

[1]
[1]

4. Release the claw [1], and remove the Arm Cover [2].

6. Place the host machine [1] while shifting its right


side approx. 10cm from the working table to release
the claw on the lower side of the Right Cover Unit.
[1] [2]

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the host machine when shifting
it.

[1]

5. Disconnect the arm [1], and turn it to the rear side.

CAUTION:
When opening/closing the ADF+Reader Unit after 10 cm
releasing the arm, be sure perform the work while
supporting the ADF+Reader Unit. Be careful not to get
your hand caught.

109
5. Disassembly/Assembly

7. Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1], and release the 2 9. Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1], and release the claw
claws [3] while pulling the Right Cover Unit [2] in the [3] while pulling the Right Cover Unit [2] in the
direction of the arrow. direction of the arrow.

[1]
1x
[1]

2x [2]
[3]

10. Remove the Right Cover Unit [1] in the direction of


the arrow.

[3]

[2]

8. Close the ADF + Reader Unit, and release the 2 claws


[2] on the lower side while pulling the Right Cover
Unit [1] in the direction of the arrow.

2x [1]

Removing the Front Cover


Unit
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

2. Remove the Right Cover Unit. “Removing the Right


Cover Unit” on page 108

[1]

[2]

[2]

110
5. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure ■ Procedure
1. Remove the Link Arm [1]. 1. Push down the handle [1] to open the Duplexing
Feed Unit [2].

[2]

[1]

[1]

2. Remove the Front Cover Unit [1].


• 2 Screws [2] 2. Remove the Rear Cover Unit [1].
• 5 Screws [2]
• 3 Claws [3]
2x [1]

5x 3x

[1] [3] [2]

[2]

Removing the Rear Cover Unit


[2] [3] [2]

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

2. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

3. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right


Cover Unit” on page 108

111
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the Rear Cover Unit [1] from the Duplexing


Feed Unit [2]. CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation:
• 2 Bosses [3]
1. Hook the 2 upper claws [2] on the Upper Cover [1].
2. Open the Rear Sub Tray [3], and install the Rear
[2]
[1]
Cover Unit while pressing down the Duplex
Reverse Sensor Flag [4].

[3]
[3] [4]

[2] [1]

[3]

[4]

[5]

3. Check that the Sensor Flag [4] runs through the


hole [5] on the back side of the Duplex Unit Cover.

Removing the Upper Cover


■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108

2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left


Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

4. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123

5. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF


Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114

112
5. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Upper Cover [1].
• 2 Screws (TP) [2]
• 1 Screw (Tapping) [3]
• 1 Screw [4] (to loosen)
• 2 Claws [5]

4x

2x

[4]

[1]

[2]
[5] [2]

[3]

113
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the Harness Guide [1].


Document Exposure / • 4 Claws [2]
Delivery System
4x [1]

Removing the ADF Unit +


Reader Unit
■ Preparation [2]

[2] [2]

CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement:
• “ After Replacing the Reader Unit ” on page 151

1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left


Cover Unit” on page 106

2. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

3. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123 4. Free the Flat Cable [1] from the guide [A].

4. Remove the Wireless LAN PCB.“Removing the


Wireless LAN PCB ” on page 123
1x
[A]
■ Procedure [1]

1. Disconnect the 4 Flat Cables [1] and the 3


connectors [2].

[1] [1] [2]


7x

5. Remove the ADF Harness Guide [1].


• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Hook [3]

2x

[2]
2. Free the harness [1] from the guide [A].

1x

[3] [2] [1]

114
5. Disassembly/Assembly

6. Lift the ADF + Reader Unit [1] in the direction of the 3. Remove the resin E-ring [1].
arrow and remove them. • 1 Bushing [2]

[1] [2] [1]

4. Remove the resin E-ring [1] and the bushing [2].


Removing the ADF Roller Unit
■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF Upper Cover [1].

[1]

2. Remove the gear [1] and the bushing [2].


• 1 Claw [3] 5. Remove the ADF Roller Unit [1].

[1]
[2] [3] [1]
1x

115
5. Disassembly/Assembly

2. Remove the Pickup Roller [1].


CAUTION:
When removing the ADF Roller Unit, be careful not to
lose the spring [1] on the back side. [1]

[1]

Removing the ADF Separation


Removing the ADF Pickup Roller
Roller ■ Preparation
■ Preparation 1. Remove the ADF Roller Unit.“Removing the ADF
Roller Unit” on page 115
1. Remove the ADF Roller Unit.“Removing the ADF
Roller Unit” on page 115 ■ Procedure
■ Procedure CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
CAUTION:
Do Not Touch the Surface of the ADF Pickup Roller
1. Remove the bushing [1].
When Removing or Mounting it.

1. Insert the Precision Flat-screwdriver and Remove [1]


the Pickup Roller [1] Together With the Shaft.

[1]

2. Remove the 2 resin E-rings [1].

[1]

116
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Pull out the Roller Shaft [1] in the direction of the 1. Open the ADF Upper Cover [1].
arrow, and remove the Parallel Pin [2] and the
bushing [3]. [1]

[3]
[2]

[1]

CAUTION: 2. Remove the Feed Guide [1].


Do not lose the Parallel Pin as it is a small part.
• 2 Bosses [2]

4. Rotate the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow, and


[2]
pull it out by aligning the hole of the Roller Holder
with the protrusion [2].

[2]

[1]
[1]
[2]

5. Remove the ADF Separation Roller [1].

[1]

[2]

Removing the ADF Separation


Pad
■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.

117
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the Retainer Plate [1] from the back side of 2. Remove the ADF Front Cover [1].
the Feed Guide. • 4 Claws [2]
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Protrusions [3] of the Separation Pad Holder
[1]
4x
[2]

2x

[1]

[2]

[3] 3. Slightly lift the ADF Tray [1], release the claw [2], lift
the tray to the angle of 90 degrees, and then remove
4. Remove the Separation Pad Holder [1]. it.

1x
[1]

[2]

Removing the ADF Pickup


Feed Unit
■ Procedure [1]

1. Open the ADF Upper Cover [1].

[1]

[1]

118
5. Disassembly/Assembly

4. Remove the ADF Rear Cover [1]. 7. Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit [1].
• 1 Boss [2] • 5 Screws [2]
• 4 Claws [3]

[2]
5x
4x
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]

[3]

[3] [2]
[2]

5. Disconnect the Grounding Wire [1]. 8. Remove the ADF Upper Cover Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2] • 2 Bosses [2]

1x [2]
[1]

[2] [2]

[1]

6. Free the harness [1].


• 4 Connectors [2] Removing the ADF Pickup
• 2 Wire Saddles [3]
Motor Unit
2x 4x ■ Preparation
1. Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.“Removing the
[3]
ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page 118

[1]

[2]

[3]

[2]

[2]

119
5. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure Removing the ADF Delivery


1. Remove the Harness Guide [1] from the Edge Saddle Solenoid Unit
[2].
■ Preparation
1x [1] [2] 1. Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.“Removing the
ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page 118

■ Procedure
1. Remove the E-ring [1].

[1]

2. Remove the ADF Motor Unit [1].


• 2 Screws [2]

2x

2. Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Solenoid Unit [1].


• 2 Screws [2]

[2] [1] [2]


2x
[2] [1] [2]

CAUTION:
The gear [1] of the ADF Motor Unit and the gear [2] on
the frame of the Pickup Feed Unit are not secured in
place, so be careful not to lose them.

Removing the Reader Unit


Upper Cover
■ Preparation
[1] CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement:
[2]
• “ After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit ”
on page 153

1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left


Cover Unit” on page 106

2. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

120
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the 1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Controller Cover” on page 123 Cover Unit” on page 106

4. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF 2. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114 Rear Cover” on page 107

3. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF


■ Procedure Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114

1. Remove the 2 screws [1] from the bottom of the 4. Separate the ADF from the Reader Unit.
Reader Unit.
5. Remove the Reader Upper Cover Unit.“Removing
the Reader Unit Upper Cover” on page 120
2x
■ Procedure
[1] [1] 1. Remove the Drive Pulley [1].
• 1 Claw [2]

[2] [1]

2. Remove the Reader Upper Cover Unit [1].


• 2 Screws [2]
• 7 Claws [3]

2x 7x

[2] [3] [2]


[3]

[1]

[3] [3]

Removing the CIS Unit


■ Preparation

CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement:
• “ After Replacing the Scanner Unit (CIS) ” on page
147

121
5. Disassembly/Assembly

2. Remove the CIS Mount [1] in the direction of the


arrow, and disconnect the Flat Cable [2].

[2] [1]

CAUTION:
When removing the CIS Mount, be careful not to lose
the CIS Spacers [1].

[1]

3. Lift the CIS Unit [1], and remove it in the direction of


the arrow.

[1]

122
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Controller System ■ Procedure


1. Remove the Wireless LAN PCB [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
Removing the Controller • 1 Hook [3]
• 1 Flat Cable [4]
Cover
[3]
■ Preparation 1x
1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

■ Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the Controller Cover [1].
• 6 Screws [2] [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
• 2 Connectors [4]
• 1 Harness Guide [5] 1x [4]

6x 2x 1x

[3]
[3]

[5]

Removing the Main Controller


PCB
[2]
[2]
■ Preparation
[1] [4]
CAUTION:
Actions before Replacement:
• “Actions before Replacement” on page 159
[2] Actions after Replacement:
• “After replacing main controller PCB” on page
160

Removing the Wireless LAN


1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
PCB Cover Unit” on page 106

■ Preparation 2. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123
1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
3. Remove the Wireless LAN PCB. “Removing the
Cover Unit” on page 106
Wireless LAN PCB ” on page 123
2. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
Controller Cover” on page 123

123
5. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure CAUTION:
Do not remove the eMMC PCB.
1. Disconnect the 4 Flat Cables [1] and the 8
connectors [2] from the Main Controller PCB.
• 3 Connectors [A] (MF419x/ MF419dw)
• 1 Connector [B] (EUR only)

[1]
[2]
16x

[2]

Removing the NCU PCB


(MF419x/ MF419dw)
[2]

[B] [A] ■ Preparation


1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
2. Remove the Main Controller PCB [1].
Cover Unit” on page 106
• 7 Screws [2]
2. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
[2] Controller Cover” on page 123
6x

[1]

[2]
1x

[2]

124
5. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure 3. Remove the NCU PCB [1].


• 4 Screws [2]
1. Remove the Harness Guide [1] (EUR only).
[2]
• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Claws [3] 4x
• 1 Hook [4]

[2]
[1]
1x

[1]
2x

[2]
[3]

[4]
[3] Removing the OFF Hook PCB
(MF419x/ MF419dw)
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

2. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123

■ Procedure
1. Remove the OFF Hook PCB [1].
• 1 Wire Saddle [2]
• 2 Connectors [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
2. Disconnect the cables.
• 1 Flat Cable [1]
1x 2x 2x
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 1 Connector [A] (JP only) [3]

[1]
3x
[2]

1x [4]

[3]
[1]

[A] [2]

Removing the Controller Box


■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108

125
5. Disassembly/Assembly

2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left 3. Free the Flat Cable [1] from the guide [A].
Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107
1x

4. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123

5. Remove the Wireless LAN PCB.“Removing the


Wireless LAN PCB ” on page 123

6. Remove the NCU PCB. (MF419x/ MF419dw)


“Removing the NCU PCB (MF419x/ MF419dw)” on [A] [1]
page 124

7. Remove the Main Controller PCB. “Removing the


Main Controller PCB” on page 123
4. Open the Wire Saddle [1] and the Edge Saddle [2],
and free the harnesses [3] and [4] from the guide [A].
■ Procedure
1. Free the harness [1] from the guide [A]. [2]
3x

[A]
1x [4]

[3]
[A]

[1]

[1]

2. Remove the Harness Guide [1].


• 4 Claws [2]

4x [1] [2]

[2]
[2] [3] [4]

[2]

126
5. Disassembly/Assembly

5. Remove the Controller Box [1]. ■ Procedure


• 6 Screws [2]
1. Remove the Duplex Reverse Sensor Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
6x • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 1 Harness Guide [4]
[1] [2] [2] • 1 Screw [5]

[2] 1x 2x 1x

[2] [2]
[2]

Removing the Engine [4] [3]

Controller Unit
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108 [1]

2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left


[5]
Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left 2. Free the harness [1].
Rear Cover” on page 107
• 5 Connectors [2]
4. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
Controller Cover” on page 123 • 2 Harness Guides [4]
• 1 Connector [A] (EUR only)
5. Remove the Wireless LAN PCB.“Removing the
Wireless LAN PCB ” on page 123

6. Remove the NCU PCB. (MF419x/ MF419dw) 6x 3x


“Removing the NCU PCB (MF419x/ MF419dw)” on
page 124
[2]
7. Remove the Main Controller PCB.“Removing the
Main Controller PCB” on page 123

8. Remove the Controller Box.“Removing the


Controller Box” on page 125

9. Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear


Cover Unit” on page 111 [A]
[2]
[3] [2]

[4]

[1]

127
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the Feed Guide [1]. 7. Free the Flat Cable [4] from the guide [B].
• 1 Screw [2] • 1 Ferrite Core [5]

[1] 3x 2x
1x

[2]
[5]

[4] [A]

[B]
[2]

[3] [1]
4. Disconnect the 7 connectors [1] and remove the
terminal [2].

8. Remove the 3 Fixation Screws [1] of the Engine


[2] Controller.
6x

[1]
[1]

2x [1]

[1]

[1]
5. Remove the Controller Fan Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
3x

1x
[1]

[2]

6. Free the harness [1] from the guide [A].


• 2 Terminals [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]

128
5. Disassembly/Assembly

9. Release the 2 claws [1], and move the Engine 10. Free the Flat Cable [1] and the harness [2] from the
Controller Unit [2]. holes [A] and [B] on the Side Plate, and remove the
Engine Controller Unit [3].
• 1 Wire Saddle [4]
[1]

CAUTION:
Be sure to perform the work while holding the Engine
Controller Unit due to the load being applied to the
harness.
2x

1x

[2] [3]

[B] [A]

[1]
[4]
[1]

[2]

Removing the Control Panel


■ Procedure
1. Remove the 2 Face Seals [1] and the 4 screws [2]
from the lower side of the Reader Unit.

4x [2]

[2] [1] [2]

129
5. Disassembly/Assembly

2. Remove the Control Panel [1].


NOTE:
When removing the screws on the lower side of the
• 9 Claws [2]
Reader Unit, release the claw [1], and remove the Arm • 1 Flat Cable [3]
Cover [2]. • 1 Terminal [4]
Disconnecting the arm can make the work easier.

9x 2x
[2] [1]

[1]

[2] [3] [4]

[3]

[2]

[2]

[4]

Removing the Control Panel


PCB
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Control Panel.“Removing the Control
Panel” on page 129

130
5. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure 11. Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear


Cover Unit” on page 111
1. Remove the Control Panel PCB [1].
12. Remove the Fixing Assembly.“Removing the Fixing
• 7 Screws [2] Assembly” on page 140
• 2 Flat Cables [3]

■ Procedure
7x 2x 1. Remove the Main Switch Mounting Base [1].
• 2 Claws [2]

2x
[2] [2]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1] [3]
[2] 2. Move the Harness Guide [1] to the left.
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]

1x
Removing the Main Motor [1]
[2]

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108

2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left


Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

4. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123

5. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF [3]


Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114

6. Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper


Cover” on page 112

7. Remove the Wireless LAN PCB.“Removing the


Wireless LAN PCB ” on page 123

8. Remove the NCU PCB. (MF419x/ MF419dw)


“Removing the NCU PCB (MF419x/ MF419dw)” on
page 124

9. Remove the Main Controller PCB.“Removing the


Main Controller PCB” on page 123

10. Remove the Controller Box.“Removing the


Controller Box” on page 125

131
5. Disassembly/Assembly

CAUTION: ■ Procedure
At installation, place the Harness Guide [1] to the rear
1. Remove the Main Fan [1].
side of the hook [3] of the Harness Guide [2].
• 2 Claws [2]
• 1 Connector [A] (except for EUR)
• 1 Connector [B] (EUR only)

[3] [2]

1x 2x

[A] [2]

[1]

[1]
3. Remove the Harness Guide [1].
• 2 Claws [2]

2x [B]

[2]

[1]

Removing the Main Drive Unit

4. Remove the Main Motor [1] and the Harness Guide


[2]. ■ Preparation
• 3 Screws [3]
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108
3x [3]
2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123

4. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107
[1]
5. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114
[2] [3] 6. Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper
Cover” on page 112

7. Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear


Removing the Main Fan Cover Unit” on page 111

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108

132
5. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure 3. Remove the harness [1].


• 6 Harness Guides [2]
1. Remove the Duplex Reverse Sensor Unit [1]. • 3 Connectors [3]
• 1 Connector [2] • 1 Connector [A] (except for EUR)
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 1 Harness Guide [4] [3]
• 1 Screw [5] [1]

4x
1x 2x 1x
[A]

1x
[2]
[2]

[2]
[2]

[4] [3]

[1]

[1]
4. Remove the Main Fan [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[5]
[1] [2]
2. Remove the harness [1]. 2x
• 3 Connectors [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 2 Harness Guides [4]
• 1 Connector [A] (EUR only)

4x 3x

[2]

[A]
[2]
[3]

[4]

[1]

133
5. Disassembly/Assembly

5. Remove the link [1], and free the harness [2] from the 8. Remove the Main Drive Unit [1].
Harness Guide [3]. • 4 Screws [2]
• 2 Bosses [4]

4x
1x
[2] [1]

[2]
[1] [4] [3] [2] [4] [3]

6. Remove the 2 Harness Guides [1].


Removing the Duplex Drive
• 2 Bosses [2]
Unit
[1]
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108

2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left


Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

4. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


[2] Controller Cover” on page 123

5. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF


7. Remove the plate [1], and disengage the gear [2] of
Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114
the Fixing Assembly and the Link Arm [3].
• 2 Screws [4] 6. Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper
Cover” on page 112

[1] [2]
2x

[4] [3] [4]

CAUTION:
When removing the Main Drive Unit, perform carefully
so that the gears do not get disengaged.

134
5. Disassembly/Assembly

■ Procedure 3. Remove the Duplexing Drive Unit [1].


• 3 Screws [2]
1. Free the harnesses [1] and [2] from the 4 guides [3].
• 3 Connectors [4]
• 1 Connector [A] (except for EUR) 3x [1]
• 1 Connector [B] (EUR only)
[2]

4x 4x

[4] [3]

[1] [2]

[A]

[3] CAUTION:
If the gears of the Duplexing Drive Unit have come off,
return the black gear [2] to the side with an arrow mark
[2]
[1].

[1]

[B]

[2]
2. Free the harness from the guide [A], and remove the
Main Fan Unit [1].
• 2 Screws [2]

2x 1x

[A]

[2]

[1]

135
5. Disassembly/Assembly

CAUTION: ■ Procedure
Secure the unit with screws while the stopper [1] is
1. Remove the Duplex Reverse Solenoid [1].
lowered and engaged with the gear.
When they are not engaged, the Duplexing Drive Unit • 1 Screw [2]
is not installed properly.

1x
[1]

[1] [2]

Removing the Cassette Pickup


Solenoid
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108

Removing the Duplex Reverse ■ Procedure


Solenoid 1. Free the harness [1] from the guides [2], and remove
the Cassette Pickup Solenoid [3].
■ Preparation • 1 Connector [4]
• 1 Screw [5]
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108
[4]
2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123

4. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

5. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF


Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114

6. Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper


Cover” on page 112

7. Remove the Duplexing Drive Unit.“Removing the 1x


Duplex Drive Unit” on page 134
[2]

1x
[5] [3]

1x

[2] [1] [2]

136
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Laser Scanner System

Removing the Laser Scanner


Unit
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
Cover Unit” on page 108

2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left


Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

4. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the


Controller Cover” on page 123

5. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF


Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114

6. Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper


Cover” on page 112

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit [1].
• 1 Sponge [2]
• 1 Connector [3]
• 1 Flat Cable [4]
• 4 Screws [5]

2x 4x

[5] [1] [5]

[4]

[2] [3] [5]

CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it
requires adjustment.

137
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Image Forming System CAUTION:


When installing the Transfer Roller, be sure to hold its
shaft [1], and do not touch its surface [2].
Removing the Transfer Roller
■ Procedure
1. Open the Cartridge Cover [1].
[1] [2] [1]
2. Hold the holder [1], and remove it in the direction of
the arrow.

Removing the Registration


Unit
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
[1] Cover Unit” on page 108

2. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left


Cover Unit” on page 106

3. Remove the Transfer Roller [1] in the direction of the 3. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
arrow. Rear Cover” on page 107

4. Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF


Unit + Reader Unit” on page 114

[1] 5. Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper


Cover” on page 112

■ Procedure
1. Remove the gear [1].
• 1 Claw [2]

1x

[1]

[2]

138
5. Disassembly/Assembly

2. Remove the guide [1].


• 2 Claws [2]

2x [2] [2] [1]

3. Remove the Registration Unit [1].


• 5 Screws [2]
• 1 Gear Cover [3]

5x [1] [2]

[2]

[2]
[2] [2] [3]

139
5. Disassembly/Assembly

Fixing System CAUTION:


Points to Note at Installation:
• The Front Cover should be closed.
Removing the Fixing • Be sure that the protrusion of the gear [1] is aligned
with the cut-off of the gear [3].
Assembly • Be sure to align the gear [1] with the cut-off of the
gear [5].
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

2. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

3. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right


Cover Unit” on page 108

4. Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear


[1]
Cover Unit” on page 111

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be careful when removing the Fixing Assembly
because it is hot immediately after the power is turned
OFF. [3]

1. Close the Front Cover, and move the gears to the


position where the Fixing Assembly can be [2]
removed. [1]

2. Remove the 3 gears [1].

[1]
[4]
[5]

[1]

140
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the Duplex Reverse Sensor Unit [1]. 5. Remove the Feed Guide [1].
• 1 Connector [2] • 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 1 Harness Guide [4]
• 1 Screw [5] [1]
1x

1x 2x 1x

[2]
[2]

6. Remove the Fixing Assembly [1].


• 3 Connectors [2]
[4] [3] • 1 Terminal [3]
• 2 Screws [4]

4x 2x
[4]
[4] [1]
[1]

[5]
[3]

4. Free the harness [1].


• 5 Connectors [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 2 Harness Guides [4]
• 1 Connector [A] (EUR only)
[2] [2]

6x 3x
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the Fixing Assembly because it
requires adjustment.
[2]

[A]
[2]
[3] [2]

[4]

[1]

141
5. Disassembly/Assembly

3. Remove the Duplexing Feed Unit [2] from the Rear


Pickup / Feed System Cover Unit [1].
• 2 Bosses [3]

Removing the Duplex Feed [2]


[1]
Unit
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
Cover Unit” on page 106

2. Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left


Rear Cover” on page 107

3. Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right [3]


[3]
Cover Unit” on page 108

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.

1. Push down the handle [1] to open the Duplexing


Feed Unit [2]. Removing the Cassette Pickup
Roller
■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
[2]

1. Remove the cassette [1].


[1]

2. Remove the Rear Cover Unit [1].


• 5 Screws [2]
• 3 Claws [3]

5x 3x
[1]

[1] [3] [2]

[2] [3] [2]

142
5. Disassembly/Assembly

2. Remove the stopper [1] of the Shaft Support [2] with 1. Remove the cassette [1].
a flat-blade screwdriver, and rotate the Shaft
Support [2].

[1]

[2] [1]

2. Remove the Separation Pad [1].


• 2 Screws [2]
3. Remove the Cassette Pickup Roller Unit [1] in the
direction of the arrow. [2]

2x
[1]

[1]

Removing the Multi-purpose


4. Remove the Rubber Rollers [1] from both ends, and
remove the Pickup Roller [2] from the shaft. Tray Pickup Roller
■ Procedure
[1] [2] [1]

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.

1. Open the Front Cover [1].

Removing the Cassette


Separation Pad
■ Procedure [1]

CAUTION:
2. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover
Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
[1], move the Roller Holder [2] in the direction of the

143
5. Disassembly/Assembly

arrow, and remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup 2. Lower the Multi-purpose Tray pickup Guide [1], and
Roller [3]. remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad with
a flat-blade screwdriver.

[2]

[1]
[1]

[2]

3. Open the Front Cover [1], and remove the Multi-


purpose Tray Separation Pad [2].

[2]

[3]

Removing the Multi-purpose


Tray Separation Pad
■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.

[1]
1. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Cover [1].

[1]

144
6 Adjustment
Overview........................................... 146
Actions after Replacement Parts...... 147
6. Adjustment

Overview
Adjustment required in the field service works when following parts are replaced. The parts are classified by 2 function blocks.

Category Parts Reference


Document Exposure / Feed System Scanner Unit (CIS) “ After Replacing the Scanner Unit (CIS) ” on
page 147
Reader Unit “ After Replacing the Reader Unit ” on page
151
Reader Upper Cover Unit “ After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover
Unit ” on page 153
Scoopup Sheet Holder “ After Replacing the Scoopup Sheet Hold-
er ” on page 158
Controller System Main Controller PCB “After Replacing the Main Controller PCB”
on page 159

146
6. Adjustment

Actions after Replacement Parts

Document Exposure / Delivery System


■ After Replacing the Scanner Unit (CIS)
1. CIS light intensity adjustment
1. Enter a provisional value.
Change all the adjustment values of the LED lighting time for RGB colors to "0".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
2. Execute light intensity adjustment for the Scanner Unit (CIS) at ADF reading. (Be sure to close the ADF)
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
3. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
If all the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.

2. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change the adjustment value of the reading position at ADF stream reading to "-20".
• COPIER > ADJUST> ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
2. Execute automatic detection of CIS reading position at ADF stream reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
3. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the value entered in step 1 has been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
If the value entered in step 1 remains "-20", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.

3. Adjustment of the white level


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change all the shading target values at ADF reading to "0".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader, and execute white level adjustment
(color) at copyboard reading
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF, and execute white level adjustment (color) at ADF reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader again, and execute white level adjustment
(B&W) at copyboard reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3
5. Place the same blank paper on the ADF again, and execute white level adjustment (B&W) at ADF reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
6. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
Write the new adjustment values on the service label.
If the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform steps 2 to 5 again.

147
6. Adjustment

4. Adjustment of the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at ADF reading


1. Place a test chart on the ADF, and make one single-sided copy.
2. Compare the side registration of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.

Feed direction Copy of the test chart

Execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF

Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
• If the image is displaced toward the rear side => Decrease the value.
• If the image is displaced toward the front side => Increase the value.

< When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front >
Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart
Test chart Test chart

A
A

Feed direction Feed direction

3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

5. Adjustment of the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at copyboard reading


1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy.

148
6. Adjustment

2. Compare the side registration of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.

Feed direction Copy of the test chart

Execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y

Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
• If the image is displaced toward the rear side => Decrease the value.
• If the image is displaced toward the front side => Increase the value.

< When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front >
Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart
Test chart Test chart

A
A

Feed direction Feed direction

3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

6. Adjustment of the image position (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading


1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy.

149
6. Adjustment

2. Compare the image leading edge of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.

Feed direction Copy of the test chart

Execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X

Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
• If the image is displaced toward the trailing edge => Decrease the value.
• If the image is displaced toward the leading edge => Increase the value.

< When a copied image moves to < When a copied image moves to
the trailing edge > the leading edge >

Test chart Copy of the test chart

Copy of the test chart Test chart

A A

Feed direction Feed direction

3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

7. Fine adjustment of image magnification ratio (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading
1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass with the front side facing upward, and make one single-sided copy.

150
6. Adjustment

2. Compare the length of the image in the feed direction of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform
adjustment if necessary.
Execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG

Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.01%)
• To enlarge the copied image => Increase the value.
• To reduce the copied image => Decrease the value.

< When a copied image is long > < When a copied image is short >

Copy of the test chart


Test chart Copy of the test chart
Test chart

A A

Feed direction Feed direction

3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

8. Make one copy of the image, and check the copied image.

■ After Replacing the Reader Unit


1. Enter the values of the Standard White Plate signal data (X, Y, Z) written on the label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass, and write the entered values on the service label.

XXXX YYYY ZZZZ

• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X


• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z

151
6. Adjustment

2. CIS light intensity adjustment


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change all the adjustment values of the LED lighting time for RGB colors to "0".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
2. Execute light intensity adjustment for the Scanner Unit (CIS) at ADF reading. (Be sure to close the ADF.)
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
3. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
If all the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.

3. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change the adjustment value of the reading position at ADF stream reading to "-20".
• COPIER > ADJUST> ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
2. Execute automatic detection of CIS reading position at ADF stream reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
3. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the value entered in step 1 has been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
If the value entered in step 1 remains "-20", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.

4. Adjustment of the white level


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change all the shading target values at ADF reading to "0".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader, and execute white level adjustment
(color) at copyboard reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF, and execute white level adjustment (color) at ADF reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader again, and execute white level adjustment
(B&W) at copyboard reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3
5. Place the same blank paper on the ADF again, and execute white level adjustment (B&W) at ADF reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
6. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
Write the new adjustment values on the service label.
If the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform steps 2 to 5 again.

152
6. Adjustment

5. Enter the parameter values written on the "D15xx/MF41x/MF51x Reader Adjustment Sheet" included with the Reader
Unitinservice mode, and write the entered values on the service label.

• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X


• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADF-X-MG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-K

■ After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit


1. Enter the values of the Standard White Plate signal data (X, Y, Z) written on the label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass, and write the entered values on the service label.

XXXX YYYY ZZZZ

• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X


• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z

2. CIS light intensity adjustment


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change all the adjustment values of the LED lighting time for RGB colors to "0".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B

153
6. Adjustment

2. Execute light intensity adjustment for the Scanner Unit (CIS) at ADF reading. (Be sure to close the ADF.)
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
3. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
If all the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.

3. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change the adjustment value of the reading position at ADF stream reading to "-20".
• COPIER > ADJUST> ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
2. Execute automatic detection of CIS reading position at ADF stream reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
3. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the value entered in step 1 has been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
If the value entered in step 1 remains "-20", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.

4. Adjustment of the white level


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change all the shading target values at ADF reading to "0".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader, and execute white level adjustment
(color) at copyboard reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. A Place the same blank paper on the ADF, and execute white level adjustment (color) at ADF reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader again, and execute white level adjustment
(B&W) at copyboard reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3
5. Place the same blank paper on the ADF again, and execute white level adjustment (B&W) at ADF reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
6. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
Write the new adjustment values on the service label.
If the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform steps 2 to 5 again.

5. Adjustment of the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at ADF reading


1. Place a test chart on the ADF, and make one single-sided copy.

154
6. Adjustment

2. Compare the side registration of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.

Feed direction Copy of the test chart

Execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF

Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
• If the image is displaced toward the rear side => Decrease the value.
• If the image is displaced toward the front side => Increase the value.

< When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front >
Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart
Test chart Test chart

A
A

Feed direction Feed direction

3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

6. Adjustment of the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at copyboard reading


1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy.

155
6. Adjustment

2. Compare the side registration of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.

Feed direction Copy of the test chart

Execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y

Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
• If the image is displaced toward the rear side => Decrease the value.
• If the image is displaced toward the front side => Increase the value.

< When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front >
Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart
Test chart Test chart

A
A

Feed direction Feed direction

3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

7. Adjustment of the image position (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading


1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy.

156
6. Adjustment

2. Compare the image leading edge of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.

Feed direction Copy of the test chart

Execute the following service mode.


• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X

Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
• If the image is displaced toward the trailing edge => Decrease the value.
• If the image is displaced toward the leading edge => Increase the value.

< When a copied image moves to < When a copied image moves to
the trailing edge > the leading edge >

Test chart Copy of the test chart

Copy of the test chart Test chart

A A

Feed direction Feed direction

3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

8. Fine adjustment of image magnification ratio (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading
1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass with the front side facing upward, and make one single-sided copy.

157
6. Adjustment

2. Compare the length of the image in the feed direction of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform
adjustment if necessary.
Execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG

Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.01%)
• To enlarge the copied image => Increase the value.
• To reduce the copied image => Decrease the value.

< When a copied image is long > < When a copied image is short >

Copy of the test chart


Test chart Copy of the test chart
Test chart

A A

Feed direction Feed direction

3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

9. Make one copy of the image, and check the copied image.

■ After Replacing the Scoopup Sheet Holder

[1]

[1]: Scoopup Sheet Holder

1. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change the adjustment value of the reading position at ADF stream reading to "-20".
• COPIER > ADJUST> ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
2. Execute automatic detection of CIS reading position at ADF stream reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
3. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the value entered in step 1 has been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
If the value entered in step 1 remains "-20", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.

158
6. Adjustment

2. Adjustment of the white level


1. Enter a provisional value.
Change all the shading target values at ADF reading to "0".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader, and execute white level adjustment
(color) at copyboard reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF, and execute white level adjustment (color) at ADF reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader again, and execute white level adjustment
(B&W) at copyboard reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3
5. Place the same blank paper on the ADF again, and execute white level adjustment (B&W) at ADF reading.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4
6. Check the adjustment result.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment).
Write the new adjustment values on the service label.
If the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform steps 2 to 5 again.

Controller System
■ After Replacing the Main Controller PCB
● Actions before Replacement

CAUTION:
• Back up user data (settings, registered data, etc.) and service mode data for setting and registration after PCB
replacement.
*Take notes if data is unable to back up.

Backup Procedure
Perform backup of user data (such as Settings/Registration data) and service mode data in preparation to set/register them again
after replacing the PCB. Write down the data which cannot be backed up.
1. Write down the data of Menu > System Settings > Device Information> Location.
2. Export user data using remote UI.
3. Insert the USB memory into the host machine, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT to write the setting
values of the service mode to the USB memory.
4. Write down the each factory adjustment value written on the service label. (Enter them after replacement.)
Reference: The data recorded on the Main Controller can be backed up and restored by the following procedure.

Storage desti- Backup target Backup procedure


nation
USB flash drive Settings of [Menu] Connect the USB flash drive . (The USB port on the rear side of the host machine
cannot be used.)
• Home key > Menu > System Management Settings > Import/Export of Settings >
Export
Remove the USB flash drive.
• [Status Monitor] key > Device Status > Remove Memory Media
USB flash drive Service mode setting values Connect the USB flash drive . (The USB port on the rear side of the host machine
cannot be used.)
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
Remove the USB flash drive.
• [Status Monitor] key > Device Status > Remove Memory Media

159
6. Adjustment

Storage desti- Backup target Backup procedure


nation
PC Settings of [Menu] , Service • COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT > 1
mode setting values Save the backup file to any location.
• Remote UI: Menu > Import/Export > Export > Start Exporting

● After replacing main controller PCB


1. Setting of destination/paper size group
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LOCALE
• [Settings] 1: Japan, 2: North America, 3: Korea, 4: China, 5: Taiwan, 6: Europe, 7: Asia, 8: Oceania
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC
• [Settings] 1: AB series, 2: Inch series, 3: A series, 4: AB/Inch series

2. Clearing Setting/Registration data


COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL
Once executed, the following data are cleared according to the values of LOCALE and SIZE-LC set in step 1
• Setting/Registration data (Change the settings back to the initial settings)
• Service Mode data. (Change the settings back to the initial settings)
• Job IDs
• Log data
• Dates
Following data is not cleared.
• Service counter
• Reader/ADF Adjustment data

3. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.

4. Operate according to the instruction on the screen since the initial installation mode is activated. (Setting the date/
time)

5. Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > SPEC to output the spec report to check the serial number (Body.No.).

6. Enter the data backed up earlier in Menu > System Settings > Device Information > Location.

7. Import the service mode data backed up before replacement.


Insert the USB flash drive into the host machine, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT.

8. Import user data using remote UI.

9. Uninstall the drivers on the user's PC.


*For the procedure, refer to the MF Driver Installation Guide.

10. Reinstall the drivers which were uninstalled.


*For the procedure, refer to the MF Driver Installation Guide.

11. Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > COUNTER to clear the service counter.

12. Correction of coordinate position of Touch Panel in the following service mode.
COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL > TOUCHCHK

160
7 Troubleshooting
Test Print...........................................162
Trouble Shooting Items..................... 163
Debug Log.........................................166
7. Troubleshooting

Test Print

Test Pages
Printing test pages helps determine if the printer is functioning.

CAUTION:
There are two types of test pages: engine-test page and formatter-test page. Print a test page to make sure the printer
engine and the formatter are functioning.

■ Engine-test Page
There are two types of engine-test pages simplex print and duplex print.
a. Simplex print
Open and close the cartridge door three times continuously within 2 seconds during the standby period. The engine-test page
should have a test print pattern on one side of media as shown below.
b. Duplex print
Open and close the cartridge door five times continuously within 2 seconds during the standby period. The engine-test page
should have a test print pattern on both sides of media as shown below.

■ Controller Test Print


This product provides the following 8 test chart types to determine causes of faulty images. The data for test charts are created
in the main controller. If no problem is found on the output test charts, the cause may lie in the PDL input or the reader.
TYPE No. can be selected in TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE.

TYPE No. pattern image check item


0 Grid chart Right angle accuracy
Straight line accuracy
1 Halftone Transfer failure, Black line, White line, Mar-
gin
2 Solid black Transfer failure, White line, Margin
3 Solid white Fogging
4 17 gradations Gradation, Black line, White line
5 Thin horizontal line Black line, White line, Parallelism
6 PASCAL correction chart -
7 Chart 128 -

162
7. Troubleshooting

Trouble Shooting Items

Special Mode
This product has settings called Special Mode to solve print quality troubles. This function can be executed in the following user
mode.
• Menu> Adjust / Maintenance > Special mode

Special mode Options Details


Special Mode A OFF Streaks may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental condi-
Mode 1 tions.
Mode 2 In this case, setting this item may solve the problem.
Mode 3 The improvement effect is increased in the following order.
Mode 4 (Effect: Weak) <Off> -> <Mode 1> -> <Mode 2> -> <Mode 3> -> <Mode 4>(Effect: Strong)
• When printing from the computer, the setting in the printer driver takes precedence.
When the setting of [Graphics Mode] in the printer driver is changed to [UFR II Mode],
the setting in the operation panel takes precedence.
• This item cannot be set when <Barcode Adjustment Mode> is set to one of <Mode 1>
to <Mode 3>.
• Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement. It may also result in
less sharp edges and rougher details.
• If the problem cannot be solved in spite of this item having been set, set <Special Printing
Mode D> to <On>.
Special Mode U OFF Toner smudges and splatters may appear around printed characters, graphics, etc. depend-
ON ing on the paper type or the environmental conditions (more specifically when you print on
heavy paper or use the machine in an environment with low humidity).
In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
When you set this item to <On>, print quality may be lower depending on the paper type or
the operating environment (more specifically when you print on thin paper or use the machine
in an environment with high humidity).
Special Mode V OFF If the printed paper curls when you are using paper having absorbed moisture, set this item.
Mode 1 The improvement effect is increased in the following order.
Mode 2 (Effect: Weak) <Off> -> <Mode 1> -> <Mode 2> (Effect: Strong)
• Paper curls and creases can be minimized by changing the paper type and usage con-
ditions, without needing to change the setting.
• Printing speed becomes slower when you select stronger improvement.
Special Mode Z OFF Blurred smudges may appear on copied paper depending on the paper type or the environ-
(only for copying) Mode 1 mental conditions. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem.
Mode 2 The improvement effect is increased in the following order.
Mode 3 (Effect: Weak) <Off> -> <Mode 1> -> <Mode 2> -> <Mode 3> (Effect: Strong)
• Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without
needing to change the setting.
• Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement. It may also result in
less sharp edges and rougher details.
• If the problem cannot be solved in spite of this item having been set, set <Special Printing
Mode D> to <On>.
Special Mode B OFF Streaks may appear on printouts immediately after you replace the toner cartridge or when
Mode 1 you print for the first time after a long time.
Mode 2 In this case, setting this item may solve the problem.
Mode 3 The improvement effect is increased in the following order.
(Effect: Weak) <Off> -> <Mode 1> -> <Mode 2> -> <Mode 3> (Effect: Strong)
• If you change the paper type or the printing environment, liner stains may not appear
on the printed paper without any setting.
• Printing speed becomes slower when you select stronger improvement.
Special Mode C OFF When printing received fax documents or reports or lists, blurred smudges may appear on
ON printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions.
In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
• This item is only effective for printing received fax documents or reports or lists.
• If you set this item to <On>, the printing speed becomes slower.
• If the problem cannot be solved in spite of this item having been set, set <Special Printing
Mode D> to <On>.

163
7. Troubleshooting

Special mode Options Details


Special Mode D OFF Streaks may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental condi-
ON tions.
Setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Also, setting this item to <On> will reduce the operating noise during printing.
• Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without
needing to change the setting.
• If you set this item to <On>, the printing speed becomes slower.

Trailing edge image soiling


[Cause]
The image is extended when the paper feed speed is increased due to the temperature rising in the machine.
This causes the trailing edge margin to become narrow, resulting in the occurrence of image soiling (transfer toner scattering).

NOTE:
Because paper slightly shrinks due to its passing through the Fixing Assembly once when printing the 1st side, this symptom is
likely to occur on the 2nd side.

[Field Remedy]
Remedy (1): Set the Special Mode U to ON.
Effect: Image soiling is controlled by changing the settings of transfer high voltage current.
Remedy (2): Change the paper type mode from "Plain" to "Plain L".
Effect: Fixing control temperature is reduced => Temperature rising in the machine is controlled => Reduction of trailing edge
margin is controlled.
When the effect is not enough with remedy (1), perform the remedies (1) + (2).

Repetitive Image Defects Ruler


Component Distance between defects (mm)
Registration roller About 43
Primary charging roller About 38
Photosensitive drum About 75
Developing roller About 42
Transfer roller About 39
Fixing film unit About 57
Pressure roller About 63

Nip-width Specifications
The nip-width of the fixing unit is not adjustable in this printer, however the improper nip-width may cause the poor fixing.

1. Select TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE, and set the value to "2". (Solid black is printed.)

2. Select TESTMODE > PRINT > START, and press the Apply key.

3. Turn the printed side of the solid black printed paper down, and place it in the cassette of the machine.

4. Select TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE, and set the value to "3". (Blank image is printed.)

5. Select TESTMODE > PRINT > START, and press the Apply key.

6. Open the Front Door immediately before the paper is delivered (when the paper is fed through the Fixing Assembly),
and take out the printed paper after leaving it for 10 seconds or longer.

164
7. Troubleshooting

7. Measure the glossy part on the printed sheet as shown in the figure below to confirm if the width is in the tolerable
ranges.
• Center (a): 7.1±1.0 mm
• Edge (b) , (c): 7.1±1.0 mm

Media feed direction


a Center of
A4 sized paper

165
7. Troubleshooting

Debug Log

Function Overview
The debug log is a log that analyzes the program behavior of the machine to enable developers to identify problems.
This machine is embedded with a function that compiles the log of the behavior of each software module as debug log and outputs
it as integrated log for analyzing problems.
Be sure to collect the debug log when the Support Dept. of sales company so instructs.
Note that there is no need for service technicians to check the content of collected debug log.

■ Cases in which collection of debug log is effective


Collection of debug log is effective in the following cases:
• Neither the Support Dept. of sales company nor CINC can reproduce the trouble that occurred at the customer site
• When the error frequency is low
• When the failure is suspected to be due to firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical failure.

CAUTION:
If the procedure for reproducing the failure is clear and the Support Dept. of sales company and CINC can reproduce it,
collection of debug log is not necessary.

Conditions for collecting logs


■ Conditions for not being able to collect logs
In the following cases, the procedure for obtaining logs is not required because logs cannot be obtained.
• Service mode screen cannot be accessed
• The machine cannot recognize a USB flash drive
• No USB port is installed in the machine (when the model has only a copy function)

■ What is necessary to collect logs


A USB flash drive that satisfies the following conditions is required to obtain the debug logs of the machine:
• Formatted in FAT 16/FAT32
• There is a free space of approx. 100MB.
• Can be recognized by the machine

Collection procedure
The following shows the procedure for collecting the debug log from the Control Panel.

166
7. Troubleshooting

1. Connect a USB flash drive to the machine. In the case of a model having a USB connector on a side of the Control
Panel, be sure to connect the USB flash drive to the Control Panel. In the case of a model having a USB connector
only on the rear side, connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector on the rear side.

CAUTION:
In the case of a model having a USB connector on the Control Panel, if the USB flash drive is connected to the USB
connector on the rear side, debug logs are not transferred to the USB flash drive.

2. Execute the following service mode from the Control Panel or Remote UI.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > LOGWRITE

SERVICE MODE DISPLAY


COPIER IO CCD
CLEAR PANEL-UP
FEEDER ADJUST LOGWRITE
FAX FUNCTION MISC-R LOGWRITE ?
MISC-P IMPORT
TESTMODE OPTION EXPORT
COUNTER SYSTEM Executing...
VIFFNC SAVE-SM
SPLMAN RSTR-SM
LOG2USB Yes No

"Executing..." is displayed while log collection is executed. When it is completed, the screen shows the service mode screen
again.

3. Execute the following service mode from the Control Panel or Remote UI.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > LOG2USB

SERVICE MODE DISPLAY


COPIER IO CCD
CLEAR PANEL-UP
FEEDER ADJUST LOGWRITE
FAX FUNCTION MISC-R LOG2USB ?
MISC-P IMPORT
TESTMODE OPTION EXPORT
COUNTER SYSTEM Executing...
VIFFNC SAVE-SM
SPLMAN RSTR-SM
LOG2USB Yes No

"Executing..." is displayed while log collection is executed. When it is completed, the screen shows the service mode screen
again.

4. Remove the USB flash drive by the correct procedure.


Connect the USB flash drive to the PC, and check that the log file shown below has been saved.
• Output by LOGWRITE : SUBLOG.TXT
• Output by LOG2USB : SUBLOG_yyyymmdd.HHMMSS_xxx.gz (the file may be divided into multiple files)

167
8 Error/Jam/Alarm
Overview........................................... 169
Error codes........................................170
Jam code...........................................172
Alarm Code....................................... 174
8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Overview
This section describes codes shown in case any problem is occurred.

Code type Explanation Reference


Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine. “Error codes” on page 170
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. “Jam code” on page 172
Alarm code This code is displayed when a part of function is lost. “Alarm Code” on page 174

Jam Code

Loca!on Posi!on
yymmdd Code Code

110508 2310 3-0040-1-02


JAM Paper
Time Code
Code

■ Location code
Location information is displayed as 1-digit number as follows.

Device Location code


Host machine 3
ADF 4

■ Position code
When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated wuth the following pickup position code.

Device position code


ADF 0
MP Tray 0
Cassette 1 1
Option Cassette 2
Duplex 7

169
8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Error codes
If an error occurs, turn OFF and then ON the power first to check whether the same error occurs. (In the case of controller-related
errors, the machine may recover by turning OFF and then ON the power.)
*: Supported by model with FAX only

E Code Title Detection description Remedy


E000 - 0000 Error in temperature Temperature of the Fix- 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and
rising of Fixing As- ing Assembly did not the Engine Controller PCB.
sembly reach a certain tempera- 2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
ture within the specified 3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
period of time.
E001 - 0000 Abnormal high tem- It was detected that the 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and
perature of Fixing As- temperature of the Fixing the Engine Controller PCB.
sembly Assembly was abnor- 2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
mally high. 3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
E003 - 0000 Abnormal low tem- It was detected that the 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and
perature of Fixing As- temperature of the Fixing the Engine Controller PCB.
sembly Assembly was abnor- 2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
mally low. 3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
E004 - 0000 Error in fixing power The zero cross signal 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and
supply drive circuit was not detected for the the Engine Controller PCB.
specified period of time 2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
or more. 3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
E014 - 0000 Error in startup of the Revolution of the Main 1. Check the connector connection between the Main Motor and the
Main Motor Motor did not reach the Engine Controller PCB.
specified value. 2. Replace the Main Motor.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
E100 - 0000 Laser Scanner As- BD cycle of the Laser 1. Check the connector connection between the Main Controller PCB
sembly error Scanner Unit was not and the Laser Scanner Unit.
within the specified 2. Check the connector connection between the Relay PCB and the
range. Laser Scanner Unit.
3. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
E196 - 2000 Main Controller PCB Error in writing/reading of 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
writing/reading error the setting values stor- 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
age area in the Main
Controller PCB
E196 - 3000 ROM writing/reading An error occurred when 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
error (eMMC) writing/reading data to/ 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
from the ROM.
E196 - 3001 ROM-ID mismatch An error occurred when 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
(eMMC) writing/reading data to/ 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
from the ROM.
E202 - 0001 CIS Unit HP error The CIS Unit did not 1. Replace the Reader HP Sensor.
(outward) move to HP even it 2. Replace the Reader Motor.
moved backward. Read- 3. Replace the CIS Unit.
er HP Sensor error, 4. Replace the Reader Unit.
Reader Motor error, CIS
Unit error
E202 - 0002 CIS Unit HP error The CIS Unit did not 1. Replace the Reader HP Sensor.
(homeward) move to HP even it 2. Replace the Reader Motor.
moved forward. Reader 3. Replace the CIS Unit.
HP Sensor error, Reader 4. Replace the Reader Unit.
Motor error, CIS Unit er-
ror
E246 - 0000 System error System error Contact the sales company.
E247 - 0000 System error System error Contact the sales company.
E302 - 0001 Light intensity of the When the light intensity 1. Disconnect and then connect the Flexible Cable.
CIS Unit below the is below the reference 2. Replace the Flexible Cable.
reference level level at shading 3. Replace the CIS Unit.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (PCB2).
E350 - 0000 System error System error Contact the sales company.

170
8. Error/Jam/Alarm

E Code Title Detection description Remedy


E354 - 0000 System error System error Contact the sales company.
E355 - 0000 System error System error Contact the sales company.
E355 - 0004 System error System error Contact the sales company.
E355 - 0005 System error System error Contact the sales company.
E719 - 0000 Card Reader com- Communication with the 1. After tuning OFF the power, check the connection of the Card
munication error (se- Card Reader could not Reader-F1 and the short connector [A], and turn ON the power.
rial communication) be started at startup. 2. After turning OFF the power, replace the cable included in the
package of the Card Reader-F1 or the Copy Card Reader Attach-
ment-J1, and turn ON the power.
E732 - 0000 Scanner communi- Scanner communication 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
cation error error 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
E733 - 0000 Printer communica- Communication error be- 1. Check the connector connection between the Engine Controller
tion error tween the Engine Con- PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
troller PCB and the Main 2. Install the set of the controller firmware.
Controller PCB occur- 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
red. 4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
E736* - 0000 Communication error Communication error 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
with CCU/modem with CCU/modem, NCU 2. Replace the NCU PCB.
PCB type error 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
E736* - 0001 Error in ROM for An error occurred in 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
backing up fax data ROM for backing up fax 2. Replace the NCU PCB.
data 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
E744 - 4000 Engine ID error Invalid engine connec- 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
tion was detected. 2. Check the Engine Controller PCB.
3. Install the Engine Controller PCB.
4. Install the set of the controller firmware.
5. Check the model code. (When the model code and the engine code
are mismatched, E744-4000 occurs.)
E744 - 5000 Error in the Control Error in the Control Panel 1. Check the Control Panel PCB, and install the firmware (PANEL).
Panel PCB PCB (microcomputer) 2. Install the set of the controller firmware.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
E744 - 6000 Communication error Communication with the 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
with Wireless LAN Wireless LAN PCB could 2. Check the connection of the Wireless LAN PCB.
PCB not be established. 3. Install the set of the controller firmware.
4. Replace the Wireless LAN PCB.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
E804 - 0004 Controller Fan error Since the startup of the 1. Check power supply to the Controller Fan.
Controller Fan, the Fan 2. Replace the Controller Fan.
was locked for a speci-
fied consecutive period
of time.
E805 - 0000 Main Fan error The Main Fan was 1. Check the connection of the Main Fan.
locked for a specified 2. Replace the Main Fan.
consecutive period of
time.
E808 - 0000 Low-voltage power Printer detected low-volt- 1. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
supply failure detec- age power supply failure.
tion

171
8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Jam code

PS3

PS2

PS915
PS204

PS205
PS201

Location Jam code Types of jam Sensor name/Detection description Sensor number
04 0001 Delay Jam Document End Sensor PS2
04 0002 Stationary Jam Document End Sensor PS2
04 0004 Delay Jam Document End Sensor (2nd side) PS2
04 0005 Stationary Jam Document End Sensor (2nd side) PS2
04 0071 Sequence jam Timing error -
04 0094 Power-on jam Document End Sensor PS2
03 0104 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Top Sensor PS204
03 010C Fixing Delivery Delay Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
Jam 1
03 0144 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Top Sensor PS204
03 014C Fixing Delivery Delay Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
Jam 1
03 0184 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Top Sensor PS204
03 018C Fixing Delivery Delay Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
Jam 1
03 01C4 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Top Sensor PS204
03 01CC Fixing Delivery Delay Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
Jam 1
03 0208 Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Top Sensor PS204
03 0210 Fixing Delivery Station- Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
ary Jam 1
03 021C Paper Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
03 0220 Reverse area Jam Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201
03 0221 Reverse area Jam 2 Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201

172
8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Location Jam code Types of jam Sensor name/Detection description Sensor number
03 0248 Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor PS204/PS205/
PS915
03 0250 Fixing Delivery Station- Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
ary Jam 1
03 025C Paper Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
03 0260 Reverse area Jam Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201
03 0261 Reverse area Jam 2 Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201
03 0288 Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor PS204/PS205/
PS915
03 0290 Fixing Delivery Station- Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
ary Jam 1
03 029C Paper Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
03 02A0 Reverse area Jam Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201
03 02A1 Reverse area Jam 2 Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201
03 02C8 Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor PS204/PS205/
PS915
03 02DC Paper Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
03 02D0 Fixing Delivery Station- Fixing Delivery Sensor PS915
ary Jam 1
03 02E0 Reverse area Jam Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201
03 02E1 Reverse area Jam 2 Duplex Reverse Sensor PS201
03 1014 Internal Residual Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ PS204/PS205/
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS915/ PS201
03 1054 Internal Residual Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ PS204/PS205/
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS915/ PS201
03 1094 Internal Residual Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ PS204/PS205/
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS915/ PS201
03 10D4 Internal Residual Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ PS204/PS205/
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS915/ PS201
03 1118 Door Open Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ PS204/PS205/
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS915/ PS201
03 1158 Door Open Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ PS204/PS205/
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS915/ PS201
03 1198 Door Open Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ PS204/PS205/
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS915/ PS201
03 11D8 Door Open Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ PS204/PS205/
Duplex Reverse Sensor PS915/ PS201

173
8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Alarm Code

Alarm Code Title A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Action


85-0001 System error Contact the sales company.
85-0002 System error Contact the sales company.
85-0003 System error Contact the sales company.
85-0004 System error Auto recovery due to replacement with a new Main Controller PCB, which is a service part.
85-0005 System error Auto recovery due to replacement with a used Main Controller PCB.

174
9 Service Mode
Overview........................................... 176
COPIER............................................ 180
FEEDER............................................221
FAX................................................... 224
TESTMODE...................................... 230
FAX................................................... 232
9. Service Mode

Overview

Service Mode Menu


㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻯㻻㻼㻵㻱㻾 㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌㼏㼛㼜㼕㼑㼞

㻰㻵㻿㻼㻸㻭㼅 㻿㼠㼍㼠㼑㻌㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻵㻛㻻 㻵㻛㻻㻌㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻭㻰㻶㼁㻿㼀 㻭㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺 㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻛㻌㼕㼚㼟㼜㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺 㻿㼜㼑㼏㼕㼒㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻯㻻㼁㻺㼀 㻱㻾 㻯㼛㼡㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻲㻱㻱㻰㻱㻾 㻭㻰㻲㻌㼟㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻭㻰㻶㼁㻿㼀 㻭㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺 㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻛㻌㼕㼚㼟㼜㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻲㻭㼄 㻲㻭㼄㻌㼟㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻿㻿㻿㼃 㻮㼕㼠㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻹㻱㻺㼁 㻹㼑㼚㼡㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻺㼁㻹 㻺㼡㼙㼑㼞㼕㼏㻌㼜㼍㼞㼍㼙㼑㼠㼑㼞㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻺㻯㼁 㻺㻯㼁㻌㼜㼍㼞㼍㼙㼑㼠㼑㼞㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑
㻔㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼍㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼕㼟㻌㼚㼛㼠㻌㼍㼢㼍㼕㼘㼍㼎㼘㼑䠅

㼀㻱㻿㼀㻹㻻㻰㻱 㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌㼠㼑㼟㼠㻌㼜㼞㼕㼚㼠㻘㻌㼛㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻘㻌㼑㼠㼏㻚

㻼㻾㻵㻺㼀 㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㼠㼑㼟㼠㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

㻲㻭㼄 㻲㻭㼄㻌㼠㼑㼟㼠㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑

Backing up Service Mode


Each device is tuned at the time of shipment and the tuned values are written on the service label.
Because setting values and management data of the host machine are stored in the eMMC of the Main Controller PCB, they
need to be backed up before replacing the Main Controller PCB.(Do not remove the eMMC PCB form Main Controller PCB.)
Also, restoration of the backup data is necessary after replacing the Main Controller PCB.
• Backup: Connect a USB memory device to the USB memory port.
FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
• Restore: Restore backup data of the USB memory
FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT
Reference:
Saving Registered Data: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Import/Export > Export
Loading Registered Data: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Import/Export > Import

176
9. Service Mode

Screen flow of Service mode


• Initial screen

Scroll the screen. : Flick the screen.


Go to Category / Sub category selection : Tap the screen. SERVICE MODE
screen
COPIER
Go to Up category screen : Return key
FEEDER
FAX
TESTMODE

• Category / Sub category selection screen

Scroll the screen. : Flick the screen.


Go to Item selection screen : Tap the screen.
',63/$<
Go to Initial screen : Return key
,2
$'-867
)81&7,21
237,21

• Item selection screen

Select the item : Flick the screen.


Go to Numeric value entry screen : Tap the screen. $'-;<
Go to Category / Sub category selection : Return key &&'
screen
3$6&$/
9,)$'-
6&15

• Numeric value entry screen

Enter the setting value. : numeric keypad


Switch the sign (+/-) of the value : [*] Key $'-;<
Increment the setting value one by one : [▲] (Tap the screen )
Decrease the setting value one by one : [▼] (Tap the screen )
Change the setting : [Apply] Key (Tap the screen )

Change no settings : Return key
$SSO\
• Method to display the setting value of switch
• On decimal display format, display is left aligned. (Comma is put every 3 digits.)
• On binary display format, the most significant bit is placed at the leftmost position and the least significant bit is placed
at the rightmost position.

Remote UI Service Mode


■ Function Overview
It is possible to display, configure, and execute various service mode modes as well as restart the host machine by using remote
UI.

177
9. Service Mode

■ Operating conditions
In order to operate service mode using Remote UI, the following conditions must be met.
• Service mode is not used on the Control Panel.
If service mode is accessed from the Control Panel of the host machine, "Log-in user exists already." is displayed when
service mode is accessed from Remote UI.

• When Remote UI service mode (this function) is not being logged in by other users
When service mode is being accessed from Remote UI, "Remote service mode" is displayed on the UI of the host machine.

Remote service mode

• When Remote UI is enabled in the setting on the Control Panel


[Settings/Registration] > [System Settings] > [Remote UI Settings] > [Use Remote UI] > [ON]
• When the following setting is enabled (setting value: 1) in service mode
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > RMT-SW (Remote UI service mode function)
0:OFF(default), 1:ON

■ How to Use
1. Activate the Web browser, and access the following URL:
http://<Host machine's IP address or host name>/servicemode.html

2. Enter the password, and click [LOGIN].


Password required for authentication differs depending on the following service mode setting:
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PSWD-SW

PSWD-SW value Password required for authentication


0 • Password of RUI service mode
1 • Password of RUI service mode
• Service mode password
2 • Password of RUI service mode
• User's system administrator ID
• Password of system administrator
• Service mode password

* Password of service mode can be changed in COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SM-PSWD.

178
9. Service Mode

3. When finishing the operation, click [Log Out].

NOTE:
If you logged in and then closed the browser without "logging out", you are recognized as "logged in". Therefore, when logging in
service mode again, wait for a fixed time (3 minutes) from the last access to let the session time out, or turn OFF and then ON the
power.

● Authentication screen
• PSWD-SW : 0

• PSWD-SW : 1

• PSWD-SW : 2

179
9. Service Mode

COPIER

DISPLAY
■ VERSION
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
MAIN Display of MAIN (main program) version
Detail To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

BOOT Boot ROM version


Detail To display the version of Boot ROM (BOOT program).
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

LANG Language pack version


Detail To display the version of language pack.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

DEMODATA Demo print data version


Detail To display the version of demo print data. Since this machine does not have demo print function,
"FF.FF"is displayed.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

ECONT ECONT version


Detail To display the version of Engine Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

PANEL Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM ver


Detail To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > PANEL-UP

■ USER
COPIER > DISPLAY > USER
SPDTYPE To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board.
Detail To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board.
Use Case When checking the engine speed type
Adj/Set/Operate Method None (display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00 to 99

180
9. Service Mode

■ CCD
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
TARGET-B Shading target value (B)
Detail To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered a failure of the CIS Unit.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1202
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B

TARGET-G Shading target value (G)


Detail To display the shading target value of Green.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered a failure of the CIS Unit.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1163
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G

TARGET-R Shading target value (R)


Detail To display the shading target value of Red.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered a failure of the CIS Unit.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1135
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R

TARGETBW Shading target value (BW)


Detail To display the shading target value at B&W jobs. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048
(maximum) is considered a failure of the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1072
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW

■ ERR
Error code display screen
Up to 20 E codes and detailed codes for system errors can be shown.

■ JAM
Jam code display screen
Up to 20 Jam codes and detailed codes for system errors can be shown.

181
9. Service Mode

ADJUST
■ ADJ-XY
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
ADJ-X Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan
Detail To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning
direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1mm.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the CIS Unit (Scanner Unit)
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-Y Adjustment of image position at copyboard reading (horizontal scanning direction)


Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the front by 0.1mm.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the CIS Unit (Scanner Unit)
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-Y-DF Adj img pstn in ADF mode:horz scan


Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at ADF reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the front by 0.1mm.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF
- When replacing the CIS Unit (Scanner Unit)
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

182
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY


ADJ-X-MG Fine adj image ratio: vertical scanning
Detail To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in the vertical scanning direction by
changing the reading cycle of CIS
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service
label.
As the value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01%.
+: Reduce
-: Enlarge
Use Case Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Adj/Set/Operate Method After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Caution -200 to 200
Display/Adj/Set Range 0.01%
Appropriate Target Value 0

STRD-POS Adjustment of reading position at ADF stream reading


Detail To adjust the reading position at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF
- When replacing the CIS Unit (Scanner Unit)
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

ADJ-S Adj image read start position: horz scan


Detail To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction when black line/white
line occurs.
When replacing the CCD Unit/clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit, enter the value of service
label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When clearing the Reader-related RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution When COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RDSHDPOS is executed, the value of this item may
change. If the value is changed, write the value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RDSHDPOS
Supplement/Memo The shading position can be adjusted automatically by COPIER>
FUNCTION> INSTALL> RDSHDPOS.

183
9. Service Mode

■ CCD
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
W-PLT-X White level data (X) entry of white plate
Detail To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate.
Enter the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the Barcode Label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass when replacing the ADF / Reader Unit, Reader Upper Cover Unit, and Main
Controller PCB.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999
Default Value 8273
Related Service Mode COPIER. > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z

W-PLT-Y White level data (Y) entry of white plate


Detail To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the
glass.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999
Default Value 8737
Related Service Mode COPIER.> ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Z

W-PLT-Z White level data (Z) entry of white plate


Detail To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the
glass.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999
Default Value 9427
Related Service Mode COPIER.> ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y

184
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


DFTAR-R Adjustment of shading target value (R) at ADF reading
Detail To adjust the shading target value of Red at ADF reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass / Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER >
FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the
service label.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner (CIS) Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1105
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > TARGET-R
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2

DFTAR-G Adjustment of shading target value (G) at ADF reading


Detail To adjust the shading target value of Green at ADF reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass / Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER >
FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the
service label.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner (CIS) Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1129
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > TARGET-G
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2

DFTAR-B Adjustment of shading target value (B) at ADF reading


Detail To adjust the shading target value of Blue at ADF reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass / Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER >
FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the
service label.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner (CIS) Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1151
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > TARGET-B
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2

185
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


DFTAR-BW Adjustment of shading target value (B&W) at ADF reading
Detail When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass / Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER >
FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the
service label.
Use Case - When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner (CIS) Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1072
Related Service Mode COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > TARGETBW
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4

50-RG Color displacement (R and G lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction (50%)
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction at 50%
copyboard reading
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
reading mode.

50-GB Color displacement (G and B lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction (50%)
Detail To correct the color displacement between G and R lines in vertical scanning direction at 50%
copyboard reading
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
reading mode.

186
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


100-RG Color displacement (R and G lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction
(100%)
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction at 100%
copyboard reading
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 100% reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
reading mode.

100-GB Color displacement (G and B lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction
(100%)
Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction at 100%
copyboard reading
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 100% reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
reading mode.

50DF-RG Color displacement (R and G lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction at
ADF reading (50%)
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction at 50% ADF
reading
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
reading mode.

187
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


50DF-GB Color displacement (G and B lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction at
ADF reading (50%)
Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction at 50% ADF
reading
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
reading mode.

100DF-RG Color displacement (R and G lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction at
ADF reading (100%)
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction at 100%
ADF reading
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 100% reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
reading mode.

100DF-GB Color displacement (G and B lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction at
ADF reading (100%)
Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction at 100%
ADF reading
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 100% reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction
reading mode.

OFST-BW0 Adjustment of CIS (Rear) at B&W reading


Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Rear) when reading B&W original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC

188
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


OFST-BW1 Adjustment of CIS (Center) at B&W reading
Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Center) when reading B&W original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC

OFST-BW2 Adjustment of CIS (Front) at B&W reading


Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Front) when reading B&W original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC

OFST-CL0 Adjustment of CIS (Rear) at color reading


Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Rear) when reading color original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

OFST-CL1 Adjustment of CIS (Center) at color reading


Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Center) when reading color original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

OFST-CL2 Adjustment of CIS (Front) at color reading


Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Front) when reading color original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

189
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


OFST2CL0 Adj CIS-ch0 offset: color mode, 600 dpi
Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 0 in color mode with 600 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
Supplement/Memo It is updated automatically when the value of CL-AGC is changed.

OFST2CL1 Adj CIS-ch1 offset: color mode, 600 dpi


Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 1 in color mode with 600 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
Supplement/Memo It is updated automatically when the value of CL-AGC is changed.

OFST2CL2 Adj CIS-ch2 offset: color mode, 600 dpi


Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 2 in color mode with 600 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
Supplement/Memo It is updated automatically when the value of CL-AGC is changed.

GAIN-BW0 Adjustment of gain at B&W 300 dpi reading


Detail To adjust the gain when reading B&W 300 dpi original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC

GAIN2BW0 Adjustment of gain at B&W 600 dpi reading


Detail To adjust the gain when reading B&W 600 dpi original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC

190
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


GAIN-CL0 Adjustment of gain at color 300 dpi reading
Detail To adjust the gain when reading color 300 dpi original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

GAIN2CL0 Adjustment of gain at color 600 dpi reading


Detail To adjust the gain when reading color 600 dpi original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

LED-BW-R Adjustment of LED light-up time (R) at B&W reading


Detail To adjust the red color LED lighting time when reading B&W original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2432
Default Value 1000
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

LED-BW-G Adjustment of LED light-up time (G) at B&W reading


Detail To adjust the green color LED lighting time when reading B&W original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2432
Default Value 1000
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION >CCD > BW-AGC

LED-BW-B Adjustment of LED light-up time (B) at B&W reading


Detail To adjust the blue color LED lighting time when reading B&W original.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2432
Default Value 1000
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC

191
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


LED-CL-R Adjustment of R color LED lighting time at reading color 300 dpi (primary light source)
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit
in color mode with 300 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192
Default Value 2818
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LED-CL-G Adjustment of G color LED lighting time at reading color 300 dpi (primary light source)
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner
Unit in color mode with 300 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192
Default Value 896
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LED-CL-B Adjustment of B color LED lighting time at reading color 300 dpi (primary light source)
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit
in color mode with 300 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192
Default Value 1721
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LED2CL-R Adjustment of R color LED lighting time at reading color 600 dpi (primary light source)
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit
in color mode with 600 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192
Default Value 3826
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LED2CL-G Adjustment of G color LED lighting time at reading color 600 dpi (primary light source)
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner
Unit in color mode with 600 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192
Default Value 1792
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

192
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD


LED2CL-B Adjustment of B color LED lighting time at reading color 600 dpi (primary light source)
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit
in color mode with 600 dpi.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192
Default Value 5924
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

■ PASCAL
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
OFST-P-K Bk density adj at test print reading
Detail To adjust the offset of Bk color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust).
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the greater value is set, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -32 to 32
Default Value 0

■ FEED-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C1 Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup
from the standard cassette
Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when picking up paper
from the standard cassette.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -12 to 12
Default Value 0 (According to the setting at shipment)

ADJ-C2 Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup
from the option cassette
Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when picking up paper
from the option cassette.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -12 to 12
Default Value 0 (According to the setting at shipment)

ADJ-MF Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup
from the Multi-purpose Tray
Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when picking up paper
from the Multi-purpose Tray.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -12 to 12
Default Value 0 (According to the setting at shipment)

193
9. Service Mode

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ


ADJ-REFE Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at 2-sided
pickup
Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at 2-sided pickup.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -12 to 12
Default Value 0 (According to the setting at shipment)

■ PANEL
COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL
TOUCHCHK Correction of coordinate position of Touch Panel
Detail To correct the coordinate on the Touch Panel.
Use Case When a problem occurs to the coordinate position in such a way that a position different from the
one that was touched reacts.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Touch the "+ (plus)" mark displayed on the Touch Panel with something with a sharp tip such as
a pen.

TOUCH_R Flag to check whether the correction of coordinates on the Touch Panel was properly
executed
Detail To check whether the correction of coordinates on the Touch Panel was properly executed. 1 is
displayed when the correction of coordinates is properly executed. 0 is displayed when it fails.
Use Case When executing the correction of coordinates after replacing the Touch Panel with a new one
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not executed
1: Executed
Default Value 0

FUNCTION
■ CCD
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
DF-WLVL1 White level adj in book mode: color
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the CIS Unit
- When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

194
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD


DF-WLVL2 White level adj in ADF mode: color
Detail To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used
by the user on the ADF.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the CIS Unit
- When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

DF-WLVL3 White level adj in book mode (B&W)


Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the CIS Unit
- When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

DF-WLVL4 White level adj in ADF mode (B&W)


Detail To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used
by the user on the DADF.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the CIS Unit
- When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3

CL-AGC CIS intensity adjustment in ADF (color)


Detail To adjust the black/white level of the CIS for ADF scanning automatically by setting the paper
which is usually used by the user on the ADF.
(For color scanning)
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the CIS Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC

195
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD


BW-AGC CIS intensity adjustment in ADF (B&W)
Detail To adjust the black/white level of the CIS for ADF scanning automatically by setting the paper
which is usually used by the user on the ADF. (For B&W scanning)
Setting values of the following service modes are automatically calculated: COPIER > ADJUST >
CCD > OFST-BW0/1/2, GAIN-BW0, LED-BW-R/G/B.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the CIS Unit
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > OFST-BW0
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > OFST-BW1
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > OFST-BW2
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > GAIN-BW0
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B

■ CLEAR
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
R-CON Initialization of Reader / ADF
Detail To initialize the factory adjustment values of the Reader / ADF.
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Press Yes key.

SRVC-DAT Clearing of service mode setting values


Detail To clear the service mode setting values.
The user mode setting values are not cleared.
The factory adjustment values of the Reader / ADF are not initialized.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.

COUNTER Clearing of service counter


Detail To clear the counter by maintenance / part/mode.
The numerator printed on a system dump list becomes 0.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.

HIST Clear of logs


Detail To clear the communication management / print / jam / error log.
Use Case When clearing logs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.

196
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR


CARD Clearing of Card Reader connection info
Detail To clear the information on connection of the Copy Card Reader-F1.
The data related to the card ID (department) is cleared, and the ID and password of the system
administrator are initialized.
Use Case When removing the Card Reader-F1
Adj/Set/Operate Method When removing the Card Reader-F1
1) Disable the department ID management.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
3) In COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD, clear the information on connection of the Copy
Card Reader-F1.
4) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > E719-CLR.
5) Turn OFF the main power.
6) Remove the Card Reader-F1.
7) Turn ON the main power.
Caution - Execute this item after disabling the department ID management via LUI or RUI
- Then, clear the information on connection of the Copy Card Reader-F1 and execute E719-CLR
(clear E71
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > E719-CLR

E719-CLR Clearing of E719 error


Detail To clear E719 error (communication error with the Card Reader).
Use Case When removing the Card Reader-F1
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD

ALL Clearing of setting information


Detail Clear/initialize the following setting information according to the location set in COPIER > OPTION
> BODY > LOCALE, SIZE-LC:
- User mode setting values
- Service mode setting values (excluding service counter)
- ID and password of the system administrator
- Communication management / printing / jam / error history
- E719-CLR
The following is not initialized:
- Service counter
- Factory adjustment values of the Reader / ADF
Use Case At installation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LOCALE, SIZE-LC

ERDS-DAT Initialization of Embedded-RDS setting value


Detail To initialize the Embedded-RDS setting values.
ON / OFF of Embedded-RDS, UGW (remote monitoring service system) port number, and
communication error log set in service mode are initialized.
Use Case When upgrading the version of Bootable in the Embedded-RDS environment
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Use of the SRAM in Embedded-RDS differs depending on the Bootable version. Therefore, unless
initialization is executed at the time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

197
9. Service Mode

■ MISC-R
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
SCANLAMP Lighting check of CIS Unit LED
Detail To light up CIS Unit LED for 3 seconds.
It lights up in the order of R, G, B, R, G and B.
Use Case When replacing the CIS Unit LED
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0
Required Time 3 seconds

SCAN-ON Execution of copyboard reading


Detail To execute reading of the original on the Copyboard Glass.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1. Place paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2. Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0

■ MISC-P
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
SRVC-DAT Output of system data list/system dump list
Detail To execute report output of the system data list and the system dump list.
System data list: The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function
System dump list: The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number
of sheets printed / read, the number of errors, etc.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

SYS-DAT Output of system data list


Detail To execute report output of the system data list.
The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function are output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

SYS-DMP Output of system dump list


Detail To execute report output of the system dump list.
The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number of sheets printed/
read, the number of errors, etc. are output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

CNTR Output of counter report


Detail To output the counter report.
The usage of functions (reading, recording, communication and copy) is output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

ERR-LOG Output of error log report


Detail To output the error log report.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

SPEC Output of spec report


Detail To output the spec report.
The current device specifications such as the location, model information, and ROM version are
output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

198
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P


ERDS-LOG Output of Embedded-RDS log
Detail To execute report output of the log relating to Embedded-RDS.
The date, time, code, and details (up to 130 characters) of each error that occurred are output.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

KEY-HIST Output of key log report


Detail To output the key log report.
The key log up to the time the FAX transmission task was input (the [START] key was pressed) is
output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

■ SYSTEM
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
PANEL-UP Download from USB memory (PANEL)
Detail To perform downloading when PANEL exists in the root directory of the USB memory.
Use Case At upgrade
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory.
2) Select the item, and then select Yes.
3) Turn OFF and the ON the main power.
Caution Do not turn OFF / ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
Display/Adj/Set Range Yes / No
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD, BKUP-UP

LOGWRITE Writing sublog to USB memory


Detail To write sublog that includes the following information to the USB memory.
- Job list (job name, user name, address book)
- Communications log (address book, user name)
- Job log (user name, job name)
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory.
2) Select the item, and then select Yes.
3) Turn OFF and the ON the main power.
Caution Do not turn OFF / ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
Display/Adj/Set Range Yes / No

IMPORT Reading of service mode setting value from USB memory


Detail To write the service mode setting values (excluding those related to Reader / ADF) to the USB
memory.
Use Case After replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes.
3) Turn OFF and the ON the main power.
Caution Do not turn OFF / ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.

199
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM


EXPORT Writing of service mode setting value to USB memory
Detail To write the service mode setting values (excluding those related to Reader/ADF) to the USB
memory.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB as a measure against failures
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes.
Caution "Executing..." disappears when writing is completed.

SAVE-SM Backup of service mode


Detail To record the backup of service mode in the device using DCM.
Use Case When saving the state of the device before changing the service mode setting values.

RSTR-SM Restoration of service mode


Detail To restore the backup data in the device.
Use Case When returning the state of the device to a previous one after having changed the service mode
setting values.

LOG2USB Output of log saved in eMMC to a USB


Detail Output of log saved in eMMC to a USB
Use Case When collecting debug log.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes.

LOG-DEL Deletion of log saved in eMMC


Detail Deletion of log saved in eMMC
Use Case When deleting log that has become unnecessary

■ SPLMAN
COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN
SPL14159 Fixing of USB device ID
Detail To fix the USB device ID to "000000000000".
Driver for each machine is installed to a PC. However, by fixing the serial number, the PC considers
that any connected machine to be the same machine; thus, there will be no need to install the
drivers many times.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 0

SPL65677 Increase of paper leading edge margin


Detail To increase the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased by 0.1 mm.
The value obtained by adding this value and SPL68676 (decrease of the margin) is applied.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN > SPL68676

200
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN


SPL68676 Decrease of paper leading edge margin
Detail To decrease the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is decreased by 0.1 mm.
The value obtained by adding this value and SPL65677 (increase of the margin) is applied.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN > SPL65677

SPL68677 Increase of paper right and left margins


Detail To increase the margin on the right and left of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased by 0.1 mm.
The value obtained by adding this value and SPL25607 (decrease of the margin) is applied.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN > SPL25607

SPL25607 Decrease of paper right and left margins


Detail To decrease the margin on the right and left of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is decreased by 0.1 mm.
The value obtained by adding this value and SPL68677 (increase of the margin) is applied.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN > SPL68677

SPL93822 Setting of department ID count all clear


Detail To set whether to disable clearing of all department ID counts.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled,
1: Enabled
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN > SPL78788

SPL78788 Setting of department ID count clear


Detail To set whether to disable clearing of department ID count.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled,
1: Enabled
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN > SPL93822

201
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN


SPL71100 Setting of the duty of Off-hook PCB
Detail This is the mode to make handsets of particular manufacturers to ring when fax reception mode
is set to "Fax / Tel (Auto Switch)".
Use Case When fax reception mode is set to FAX/TEL switching
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99
Default Value 50
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

SPL00171 To change the maximum auto sleep shift time.


Detail To change the maximum value of auto sleep shift time in
Settings/Registration> Timer Settings> Auto Sleep Time.
Use Case When changing the setting time to shift to auto sleep
mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range From 0 (Default for Europe) to 60 min
From 1 (Default for locations other than Europe) to Maximum value for each model
Default Value 1

SPL80100 Mask setting at copyboard scanning


Detail To cancel the image mask occurs on the left edge at
copyboard scanning.
Use Case Upon request from user who does not satisfy with the
mask on the left edge
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Mask value according to the specifications of each job
1: No mask (0 mm)
Default Value 0

SPL27354 PC-less update, RMDS environment setting


Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Production environment / Release environment
1: Production environment / Staging environment
2: Maintenance environment 1 / Release environment
3: Maintenance environment 1 / Staging environment
4: Maintenance environment 2 / Release environment
5: Maintenance environment 2 / Staging environment
Default Value 0

SPL84194 ON / OFF of E-RDS function


Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0

202
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > SPLMAN


SPL32620 Switching to enable / disable PC-less update
Detail To switch whether to enable the PC-less update function.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (default)
Default Value 1

SPL60061 Switching to display the connection destination URL setting of GoogleCloudPrint on the
remote UI
Detail To display the connection destination URL setting of GoogleCloudPrint on the remote UI.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Do not display
1: Display
Default Value 0

SPL71700 Saving of Sublog stored in eMMC to a USB memory


Detail To save Sublog stored in eMMC to a USB memory.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0

SPL01734 ON/OFF of RUI service mode function


Detail To turn ON/OFF the RUI service mode function.
(linked with OPTION>BODY>RMT-SW)
0: OFF*
1: ON
This should be supported together with OPTION>BODY>RMT-SW as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0

■ INSTALL
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
STRD-POS Scan position auto adj in ADF mode
Detail To adjust the ADF scanning position automatically.
Use Case At ADF installation/uninstallation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper for stream reading position adjustment, and then close the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS in the service label.
Caution Write the adjusted value in the service label.
Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

CARD-NUM Card first number setting


Detail To set the card first number to be used for Copy Card Reader-F1.
Use Case - At installation of the Card Reader-F1
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2701
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD

203
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL


CARD Set Card Reader management information
Detail To set the following management information at installation of the Card Reader-F1.
- Register numbers of 300 cards from the number set in CARD-NUM to the department ID.
- Initialize ID and password of the system administrator.
Use Case - At installation of the Card Reader-F1
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD-NUM

E-RDS ON / OFF of Embedded-RDS


Detail To set ON / OFF of Embedded-RDS function.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

RGW-PORT Setting of UGW port number when using Embedded-RDS


Detail To set the port number of UGW to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 65535
Default Value 443
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

COM-TEST Execution of Embedded-RDS communication test


Detail To execute Embedded-RDS communication test.
If the connection fails, the information is added to the communication error log.
Use Case When using E-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

204
9. Service Mode

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL


COM-RSLT Embedded-RDS communication test result
Detail To display the Embedded-RDS communication test result.
Use Case When using E-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range When not in execution : Unknown,
When connection is completed : OK,
When connection is failed : NG
Default Value Unknown
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

COM-LOG Embedded-RDS communication error log


Detail To display the Embedded-RDS communication error log.
The dates, times, and error codes of the latest 5 errors that occurred are displayed.
As for the error detail information, the report can be output by executing COPIER > FUNCTION >
MISC-P > ERDS-LOG.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range Date : 6 digits
Time : 4 digits
Error code : 8 digits
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ERDS-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

205
9. Service Mode

OPTION
■ BODY
COPIER > OPTION > BODY
LOCALE Setting of location
Detail To set the location.
At installation in areas other than Japan, perform the following procedure to match the setting
information with that of the location.
Use Case - At installation
- When changing the location information
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value under LOCALE, and then press Apply key.
2) Set the paper size configuration under SIZE-LC.
3) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL.
4) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Since COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL is executed when changing the location, the setting
information of user mode, service mode, etc. is initialized.
The setting information of this item is not initialized.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 10
1 : Japan
2 : North America
3 : Korea
4 : China
5 : Taiwan
6 : Europe
7 : Asia
8 : Oceania
9 : Brazil
10 : Latin
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> SIZE-LC

SIZE-LC Setting of paper size configuration


Detail To set the paper size configuration.
At installation in areas other than Japan, perform the following procedure to match the setting
information with that of the location.
Use Case - At installation
- Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set the location under LOCALE.
2) Set the paper size configuration under SIZE-LC, and then press Apply key.
3) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL.
4) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution Since COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL is executed when changing the location, the setting
information of user mode, service mode, etc. is initialized.
The setting information of this item is not initialized.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 4
1 : AB configuration
2 : Inch configuration
3 : A configuration
4 : AB / Inch configuration
Related Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LOCALE

206
9. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > BODY


MIBCOUNT Setting of MIB collection charge counter
Detail To set the range of charge counter information that can obtain MIB (Management Information
Base).
Use Case When preventing the Charge Counter MIB from being used by a third party
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only the displayed counter* is obtained, 2: All charge
counters are not obtained
*: Counter specified by the following: COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 1 to 6
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER1 to 6

NS-CMD5 Setting of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at SMTP authentication


Detail Restriction of the use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at SMTP authentication
When 1 is set, CRAM-MD5 authentication method is not used.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Used (SMTP server-dependent),
1 : Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

NS-PLN Setting of plaintext authentication at SMTP authentication


Detail To restrict use of PLAIN / LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext authentication, at the time of
SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted.
When 1 is set, plaintext authentication is not used.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Used (SMTP server-dependent)
1 : Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

207
9. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > BODY


NS-LGN Setting of LOGIN authentication at SMTP authentication
Detail Restriction of the use of LOGIN authentication method at SMTP authentication
When 1 is set, LOGIN authentication method is not used.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Used (SMTP server-dependent)
1 : Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

SLPMODE Setting of shift to sleep mode


Detail To restrict shift to sleep mode 1/sleep mode 3.
When 1 is set, the machine does not shift to sleep mode.
Use Case When sleep failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Shift is available.
1 : Shift is not available.
Default Value 0

SDTM-DSP Setting of automatic shutdown menu display


Detail It is a new function added to support LOT6.
To display the auto shutdown menu in the machine supporting LOT6.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution Even the models not supporting auto shutdown function display the service mode item (In such
case, the menu will not be displayed even 1 is set).
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Hide the menu
1 : Display the menu
Default Value 0

RMT-SW ON/OFF of RUI service mode function


Detail To set whether to enable the service mode function that can be used on remote UI.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 0

208
9. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > BODY


PSWD-SW Service mode password level
Detail To change the service mode password level.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Password is not required
1: Password for service engineer is required
2: Passwords for service engineer and system administrator at user's site are required
Default Value 0

SM-PSWD Password for service engineer


Detail To set the password for service technician in 8-digit decimal number.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99999999
Default Value 11111111

■ FNC-SW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
LCDSFLG Flag to enable LOCAL CDS
Detail To enable Local CDS.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Default Value 0

CRG-PROC Setting of the operation at the end of CRG life


Detail To set the following 3 kinds of operations at the end of CRG life: Not stopped / Stopped once/
Completely stopped.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0 : Not stopped (default of B&W machine)
1 : Stopped once (default for color machine)
2 : Completely stopped
Default Value 0

CRGLF-K Reference value of components other than toner included in the CRG life (for K)
Detail Reference value of the life of the components other than toner (Drum / Developing Assembly /
waste toner) included in the life of CRG (for K)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 100 to 200
Default Value 100

■ DSPLY-SW
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
CRGLW-LV SW to display / hide the setting menu (user mode) of toner low threshold value
Detail To switch whether to display the menu to set the threshold value in user mode which generates
toner low.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 1

209
9. Service Mode

■ IMG-MCON
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
REGM-SEL Adjustment of fine density correction
Detail To adjust fine density correction.
Use Case When the density of fine line or text is dark of light at 1200 dpi printing.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Set +1 to make the density of fine line or text darker, and -1 to make it lighter at 1200 dpi printing.
Display/Adj/Set Range -1, 0, +1
Default Value 0

■ USER
COPIER > OPTION > USER
COUNTER1 Display of counter 1 type
Detail To display counter type for counter 1 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user / dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution No change is available.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0 : No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER2 Display of counter 2 type


Detail To display counter type for counter 2 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user / dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0 : No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER3 Display of counter 3 type


Detail To display counter type for counter 3 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0 : No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER4 Display of counter 4 type


Detail To display counter type for counter 4 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0 : No registration
Default Value 0

210
9. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > USER


COUNTER5 Display of counter 5 type
Detail To display counter type for counter 5 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user / dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0 : No registration
Default Value 0

COUNTER6 Display of counter 6 type


Detail To display counter type for counter 6 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user / dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0 : No registration
Default Value 0

CNT-SW Setting of charge counter display method


Detail To set display method of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen.
Set 1 to 3 to select a new method.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0 : Conventional method (type 1), 1: New method (type 2), 2: New method (type 3), 3: New method
(type 4)
Default Value 0

CONTROL Setting of PDL job charge method by CC-VI


Detail To set charge method for PDL job by the control card interface "CC-VI"
When outputting at insertion of the control card, set 1 (not counted) / 2 (counted)
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0 : Output is available without control card. Not counted.
1 : Output is available at insertion of the card. Counted.
2 : Output is available at insertion of the card. Not counted.
Default Value 0

CTCHKDSP ON/OFF of charge counter print


Detail To set whether to print the charge counter on the Counter Check screen in the System Manager
Data List.
When 1 is set, the charge counter is printed.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 1

211
9. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > USER


TNRB-SW ON/OFF of toner replacement counter display
Detail To set whether to display the toner replacement counter on the Counter Check screen.
When 1 is set, the user can check the toner replacement counter.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0 : Hide the Toner Cartridge replacement counter
1 : Display the Toner Cartridge replacement counter (No. 19x)
2 : Not used (same as the setting value of 0)
3 : Not used (same as the setting value of 0)
Default Value 0

SCALL-SW ON/OFF of Service Call button display


Detail To set whether to display or hide the Service Call button on the Touch Panel.
When 1 is set, the button is displayed.
Use Case When the sales company supports service initiated by the Service Call button
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 0

SCALLCMP Setting of Service Call complete notice


Detail To set whether to notify the completion of Service Call.
With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent to UGW to clear the Service
Call status that is retained internally.
Use Case When service technician uses this mode after completing repair
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution After executing "1: Notified", the setting value becomes 0 immediately.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Not notified
1 : Notified
Default Value 0

PS-MODE Setting of compatible mode at PS usage


Detail To set for compatibility with existing machine regarding image process or print specification with
PS print.
Setting of a value other than the setting values means that multiple settings are combined.
(Example: 7=1+2+4)
Use Case At replacement
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 63
8 : Change of default value of StrokeAdjust
Default Value 0

SMD-EXPT Export of service mode


Detail To enable the export of service mode setting values from RUI.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default Value 0

212
9. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > USER


ACC-SLP Switching of the restriction to shift to sleep mode 3 when the card is connected
Detail To switch whether to restrict the shift to sleep 3 when the card is connected.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : The machine does not shift to sleep mode 3.
1 : The machine shifts to sleep mode 3.
Default Value 1

RPL-IMP Turning ON/OFF at replacement mode


Detail To be able to import the settings values (which are exported by DCM and can only be imported to
host machine) unique to the model such as IPv4 addresses to a different machine by turning ON
the replacement mode.
Use Case When migrating the settings at replacement of a host machine with a different one of the same
model.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0

■ ACC
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
CARD-SW Setting of the screen display when the Coin Manager is connected
Detail To set the screen display when the Coin Manager is connected.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0 : "Insert the card."
1 : "Use external device for authentication."
2 : "Use the external device for payment."

CC-SPSW Setting of Control Interface Kit-C1


Detail To set whether to support the Control Interface Kit-C1.
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Parallel use with Card Reader-F1 is not available.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Not supported
1 : Supported
Default Value 0

WLAN Presence/absence of the wireless LAN function


Detail To set whether to enable the wireless LAN function.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Default Value 0 (Model where wireless LAN is provided as an option),
1 (Wireless LAN model)

213
9. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > ACC


WLANMODE Setting of IEEE802.11n
Detail To set whether to enable IEEE802.11n which is the wireless LAN standard.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Default Value 1 (All models)

UNIF-OF Forcible deactivation of the uniFLOW function


Detail If this switch is set to 1 and the device power is turned OFF and then ON while the uniFLOW
function is in active state, the uniFLOW function is forcibly deactivated.
In addition, when this switch is set to 1, Activate/Deactivate request from the server is ignored.
Use Case Avoidance operation performed by a service engineer in the event of a uniFLOW failure.
Used when, for example, connection to the uniFLOW server fails due to an error in the device.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Use only when necessary. After the work is completed, set the value back to 0.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Default Value 0

■ LCNS-TR
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
ST-BRDIM Disabling and transfer of the license of barcode reading (BarDIMM) function
Detail To disable and then transfer the license of barcode reading (BarDIMM) function.
The function is turned OFF by changing the setting value from 1 to 0 and then turning OFF and
then ON the power.device is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Once 0 is set, the function is not turned ON even if returning the setting value to 1. The license
key needs to be reissued from LMS to use the function again.
Use Case - When transferring the license to another device
- When checking the installation status
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to 0 and turning OFF / ON the
power.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo LMS (License Management Server): Server which issues licenses

214
9. Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR


TR-BRDIM Transfer license key display of BarDIMM function
Detail To display the transfer license key issued when disabling and then transferring the BarDIMM
function.
When the setting value is changed from 1 to 0 and then the power is turned OFF and then ON,
the function is turned OFF, but the transfer license key is not issued. (The license is not transferred
to other devices.)
The transfer license key is used to transfer the license from this device to another one to use the
function in the device.
Use Case - When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits
Default Value 0

ST-U-RDS Disabling and transfer of the license of ERDS function


Detail To disable and then transfer the license of ERDS function
The function is turned OFF by changing the setting value from 1 to 0 and then turning OFF and
then ON the power.device is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Once 0 is set, the function is not turned ON even if returning the setting value to 1. The license
key needs to be reissued from LMS to use the function again.
Use Case - When transferring the license to another device
- When checking the installation status
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to 0 and turning OFF / ON the
power.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo LMS (License Management Server): Server which issues licenses

TR-U-RDS Transfer license key display of ERDS function


Detail To display the transfer license key issued when disabling and then transferring theERDS function
The transfer license key is used to transfer the license from this device to another one to use the
function in the device.
Use Case - When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits
Default Value 0

215
9. Service Mode

■ LCNS-OF
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-OF
ST-BRDIM Disabling and non-transfer of the license of barcode reading (BarDIMM) function
Detail To disable and then not transfer the license of barcode reading (BarDIMM) function.
The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from 1 to 0, but the transfer license
key is not issued. (The license is not transferred to other devices.) When 1 is set, the function is
turned ON since the license key in use is enabled.
Use Case - When the function is turned OFF
- When checking the installation status
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to 0 and turning OFF/ON the
power.
The function is not turned ON even if changing the setting from 0 to 1. (Reregistration of the license
key is required.)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 0

ST-U-RDS Disabling and non-transfer of the license of Setting of ERDS function


Detail To disable and then not transfer the license of ERDS function
The function is turned OFF when changing the setting value from 1 to 0, but the transfer license
key is not issued. (The license is not transferred to other devices.) When 1 is set, the function is
turned ON since the license key in use is enabled.
Use Case - When the function is turned OFF
- When checking the installation status
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The function is turned OFF after changing the setting value from 1 to 0 and turning OFF/ON the
power.
The function is not turned ON even if changing the setting from 0 to 1. (Reregistration of the license
key is required.)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : OFF
1 : ON
Default Value 0

COUNTER
■ TOTAL
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
SERVICE1 Service-purposed total counter 1
Detail To advance the counter when a paper is delivered outside the printer.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

216
9. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL


SERVICE2 Service-purposed total counter 2
Detail To advance the counter when a paper is delivered outside the printer.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

TTL Total counter


Detail To display the total of counters of COPY, PDL-PRT, FAX-PRT, RPT-PRT, and MD-PRT.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTA L> COPY, PDL-PRT, FAX-PRT, RPT-PRT, MD-PRT

COPY Total copy counter


Detail To advance the counter when a paper is delivered outside the printer.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL > TTL

PDL-PRT PDL print counter


Detail To count up when the PDL print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL > TTL

FAX-PRT FAX reception print counter


Detail To count up when the FAX reception print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is
stacked.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL > TTL
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

RPT-PRT Report print counter


Detail To count up when the report print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL > TTL

217
9. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL


MD-PRT Media print counter
Detail To count up when the media print is delivered outside the machine.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL > TTL

2-SIDE 2-sided copy/print counter


Detail To count up the number of 2-sided copies/prints when the copy/printout is delivered outside the
machine/2-sided copy/printout is stacked.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default Value 0

SCAN Scan counter


Detail To count up the number of scan operations when the scanning operation is complete.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default Value 0

■ PICK-UP
COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
C1 Cassette 1 pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette).
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

C2 Cassette 2 pickup total counter


Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette).
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

MF Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter


Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

218
9. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP


2-SIDE 2-sided pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up in duplex mode.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

■ FEEDER
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
FEED ADF original pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the ADF.
The counter is advanced regardless of the original size.
Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by ADF
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

■ JAM
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
TOTAL Printer total jam counter
Detail To count up the number of total jam occurrences.
Use Case When checking the total jam counter of printer
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default Value 0

FEEDER ADF total jam counter


Detail When checking the total jam counter of ADF
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default Value 0

2-SIDE Duplex Unit jam counter


Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Duplex Unit.
Use Case When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default Value 0

MF Multi-purpose Pickup Tray jam counter


Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.
The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
Use Case When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default Value 0

219
9. Service Mode

COPIER > COUNTER > JAM


C1 Cassette 1 pickup jam counter
Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette).
The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default Value 0

C2 Cassette 2 pickup jam counter


Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette).
The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of times
Default Value 0

■ DRBL-2
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
DF-SP-PD Separation Pad parts counter: ADF
Detail When counting the number of sheets fed, a sheet of paper whose length in the vertical scanning
direction exceeds 324 mm is counted as 2, and a sheet of paper other than that is counted as 1.
Accumulated counter value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then enter 0.Press Apply key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

DF-SP-RL ADF Pickup Roller parts counter


Detail When counting the number of sheets fed, a sheet of paper whose length in the vertical scanning
direction exceeds 324 mm is counted as 2, and a sheet of paper other than that is counted as 1.
Accumulated counter value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then enter 0. Press Apply key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit Number of sheets
Default Value 0

220
9. Service Mode

FEEDER

ADJUST
FEEDER > ADJUST
DOCST Fine adjustment of VSYNC timing at ADF reading [front side]
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the VSYNC timing when reading the front side of original with ADF.
Execute this item when the output image after ADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leadgin edge of image is reduced by 0.1%.
(The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use Case - When installing the ADF
- When replacing the Main Contoroller PCB/ clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

LA-SPD Fine adjustment of magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at ADF stream reading
[front side]
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction when
stream reading the front side of original with ADF.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction.
(The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Use Case - When installing the ADF
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/ clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200
Unit 0.01%
Default Value 0

DOCST2 Fine adjustment of VSYNC timing at ADF reading [back side]


Detail To make a fine adjustment of the VSYNC timing when reading the back side of original with ADF.
Execute this item when the output image after ADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by
0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use Case - When installing the ADF
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

221
9. Service Mode

FEEDER > ADJUST


LA-SPD2 Fine adjustment of magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at ADF stream reading
[back side]
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction when
stream reading the back side of original with ADF.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction.
(The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Use Case - When installing the ADF
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200
Unit 0.01%
Default Value 0

DOCSTDUP DADF img lead edge margin:front, 2-sided


Detail To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image on the front side at DADF 2-sided reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by
0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the Scanner Unit or Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter
the value of service label.
Use Case - When installing DADF
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When clearing the Reader-related RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to use DOCST at the time of 1-sided reading.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER> ADJUST> DOCST, DOCST2
Supplement/Memo Since the front side reading operation differs between 1-sided and 2-sided reading, separate
service modes have been prepared to improve the accuracy.

FUNCTION
FEEDER > FUNCTION
MTR-ON Operation check of ADF Motor
Detail To start operation check of ADF Motor (M702).
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press Yes key.
The operation check is completed.
Required Time 5 secons

FEED-ON Operation check of ADF individual feed


Detail To start operation check of the ADF individual feed in the mode specified by FEED-CHK.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-CHK

222
9. Service Mode

FEEDER > FUNCTION


FEED-CHK Setting of ADF individual feed mode
Detail To set the ADF feed mode.
Feed operation is activated in the specified feed mode by executing FEED-ON.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : One-sided
1 : 2-sided
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER > FUNCTION > FEED-ON

223
9. Service Mode

FAX

List of SSSW
SSSW No. Bit No. Function
SW 01 (Switch relating to error and copy)
Bit 0 Output of error code for service technician
Bit 1 Error memory dump
SW 02 (Switch relating to settings for network connection condition)
Bit 7 Connect the terminal as F network type 2
SW 03 (Switch relating to echo prevention)
Bit 0 TCF EQM check
Bit 7 Output 1080Hz before CED
SW 04 (Switch relating to prevention of communication problems)
Bit 1 Frequency check of CI signal
Bit 3 Prohibit T.30 node F kept by both parties
Bit 4 T.30 node F echo timer
Bit 5 Frequency check of CI signal at PBX settings
Bit 6 No CNG transmission at the time of manual transmission
Bit 7 No CED transmission at the time of manual transmission
SW 05 (Switch relating to standard functions and DIS signal settings)
Bit 2 mm/inch conversion (text/photo mode / photo mode)
Bit 3 Prohibition of bit transmission after DIS bit 33
Bit 4 Declaration of cut paper
SW 06 (Switch relating to settings for reading condition)
Bit 4 Scan width 0: A4, 1: LTR
SW 07 to Not in use
11
SW 12 (Switch relating to settings for page timer)
Bit 0 Timeout period for 1 page (transmission)
Bit 1 Timeout period for 1 page (transmission)
Bit 2 Timeout period for 1 page (Halftone transmission)
Bit 3 Timeout period for 1 page (Halftone transmission)
Bit 4 Timeout period for 1 page (Reception)
Bit 5 Timeout period for 1 page (Reception)
Bit 7 Timeout period for 1 page
SW 13 Bit 2 Execution of mm/inch conversion when sending the received image
SW 14 Bit 2 Setting whether to execute inch to mm conversion in horizontal and vertical scanning directions or in vertical
scanning direction only
Bit 4 Declaration of inch-configuration resolution
SW 16 Not in use
SW 17 Bit 1 Range of selection of transmission level of modem (0 : 8 to 15, 1 : 0 to 15)
SW 18 Bit 0 Detection of carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF
Bit 1 Time to wait for carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF
Bit 2 Prohibition of communication control for IP network
SW 19 to Not in use
21
SW 22 Bit 3 Prohibition of manual polling operation
SW 23 to Not in use
24
SW 25 (Setting for report display function)
Bit 0 Prioritize the received abbreviated name to the dialed
abbreviated name
SW 26 to Not in use
27

224
9. Service Mode

SSSW No. Bit No. Function


SW 28 Bit 0 Prohibit calling party for V8 procedure
Bit 1 Prohibit called party from V8 procedure
Bit 2 Prohibit calling party from V8 late-start
Bit 3 Prohibit called party from V8 late-start
Bit 4 Prohibit V.34 called party from starting fallback
Bit 5 Prohibit V.34 calling party from starting fallback
SW 29 to Not in use
35

List of MENU
No. Parameter Selection
01 to 05 Not in use
06 Telephone line monitor 0 to 3
0: DIAL
1: SERVICEMAN1
2: SERVICEMAN2
3: OFF
07 Transmission level (ATT) 0 to 15
08 Upper limit of V.34 modulation 0 to 5
speed 0: 3429 BAUD
1: 3200 BAUD
2: 3000 BAUD
3: 2800 BAUD
4: 2743 BAUD
5: 2400 BAUD
09 Upper limit of V.34 data speed 0 to 13
0: 33.6 kbps
1: 31.2 kbps
2: 28.8 kbps
3: 26.4 kbps
4: 24.0 kbps
5: 21.6 kbps
6: 19.2 kbps
7: 16.8 kbps
8: 14.4 kbps
9: 12.0 kbps
10: 9.6 kbps
11: 7.2 kbps
12: 4.8 kbps
13: 2.4 kbps
10 OFF Hook signal frequency 0 to 2
0: 50 Hz
1: 25 Hz
2: 17 Hz
11 to 20 Not in use

List of NUM
Numeric parameter setting mode
No. Parameter Allowable setting range
01 Not in use
02 RTN transmission criteria X 1 to 99 %
03 RTN transmission criteria n 2 to 99 times
04 RTN transmission criteria m 1 to 99 lines
05 NCC pause (before ID code) 1 to 60 sec
06 NCC pause (after ID code) 1 to 60 sec

225
9. Service Mode

Numeric parameter setting mode


No. Parameter Allowable setting range
07 Spare
08 STORED_DIAL_MODE wait timer 0 to 65 sec
09 Not in use
10 T.30 T0 timer 55 sec principally
11 T.30 T1 timer (for incoming transmission) 0 to 9999 (France: 3500, Others: 3000)
12 Maximum incoming lines 0 to 65535 (line)0: without limitation
13 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3000 (set to 55 sec by default)
14 Not in use
15 Threshold between hokking nad on-hook 0 to 999
16 Lead time to the first response when switching between FAX and TEL 0 to 9
17 Duration to activate pseudo-RBT cadence 0 to 999
18 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (short) 0 to 999
19 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (long) 0 to 999
20 Duration to activate pseudo-ring cadence 0 to 999
21 Duration to deactivate OFF Hook cadence (short) 0 to 999
22 Duration to deactivate OFF Hook cadence (long) 0 to 7
23 to 24 Not in use
25 CNG monitor duration while the answering device is activated 0 to 999
26 to 28 Not in use
29 Off-hook PCB duty settings(For NAC, setting can be made with SPL71100 20 (*10ms)
in special management mode.)
30 to 48 Not in use
49 NSX MODEL ID 0 to 4095
50 Not in use
51 Threshold to detect hook 10 to 9999
52 Not in use
53 Set DTMF calling counts when receiving FAX remotely 10 to 9999 (default 25)
54 Set Busy Tone outgoing duration when using handset
55 to 80 Not in use

Setting of NCU Parameters


■ TONE/PULSE
Operation Method
1. Setting of Tone Parameters
Operate as follows, and change to the parameter setting mode.
1. While "#NCU" is displayed, press "OK" key
2. Press "#TONE" key
3. Press "OK" key
2. Setting of Pulse Parameters
Operate as follows, and change to the pulse setting mode.
1. While "#NCU" is displayed, press "OK" key
2. Press "#PULSE" key
3. press "OK" key

Item Function Setting range


TONE 01; Tone signal sending time (PSTN) 10 to 9999 (msec)
02; Minimum pause time (PSTN) 10 to 9999 (msec)
PULSE PULSE FORM Pulse digit format 0 to DP ( N )
1 to DP ( N+1 )
2 to DP ( 10-N )
PULSE NUM 01; Not in use
02; Not in use
03; Pulse dial make ratio 10 to 90 (%)

226
9. Service Mode

Item Function Setting range


PULSE PULSE NUM 04; Minimum pause time 10 to 9999 (msec)

■ DIAL TONE
● Bit Switch
Bit No. Function 1 0
Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 Cadence pattern check Not detected Detected
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal start from valid ON signal start from either valid ON signal or OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

● Numeric value parameter


Parameter No. Function Setting range
01; T0 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
02; T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
03; T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
04; T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
05; T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
06; Signal detection table 0 to 16
07; Signal detection level 0 to 7
08; Number of signal frequency 0 to 9999

■ 2nd DIAL TONE


Not in use

■ BUSY TONE 0
● Bit Switch
Bit No. Function 1 0
Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

● Numeric value parameter


Not in use

■ BUSY TONE 1
● Bit Switch
Bit No. Function 1 0
Bit 0 - - -

227
9. Service Mode

Bit No. Function 1 0


Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

● Numeric value parameter


Parameter No. Function Setting range
01; - -
02; T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
03; T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
04; T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
05; T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
06; Signal detection table 0 to 16
07; Signal detection level 0 to 7
08; Number of signal frequency 0 to 9999

■ REORDER TONE
● Bit Switch
Bit No. Function 1 0
Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal start from valid ON signal start from either valid ON signal
or OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

● Numeric value parameter


Parameter No. Function Setting range
01; - -
02; T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
03; T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
04; T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
05; T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
06; Signal detection table 0 to 16
07; Signal detection level 0 to 7
08; Number of signal frequency 0 to 9999

■ MULTI
Not in use

228
9. Service Mode

■ AUTO RX
● Numeric value parameter
Parameter No. Function Setting range
01; CI ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
02; CI LONG ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
03; CI OFF time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
04; CI LONG OFF time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
05; CI MAX OFF time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
06; CI WAIT time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
07; CI frequency 0 to 9999 (cycle)
08; CI frequency lower limit 0 to 9999 (Hz)
09; CI frequency upper limit 0 to 9999 (Hz)

■ CNG DETECT
● Numeric value parameter
Parameter No. Description Setting range
01; At F/T switching CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9999 (x10 msec)
02; CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
03; - -
04; - -
05; - -
06; - -
07; At direct connecting to answering CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
08; phone CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
09; Tolerable time of instantaneous interrup- 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
tion
10; - -
11; Number of detection 0 to 9999 (times)
12; Hit ratio 0 to 9999 (%)

■ RKEY
● Numeric value parameter
Parameter No. Function Setting range
01; Connection time of flash 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)
02; Connection time of grounding wire 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)

■ PBX DIAL TONE 1


Not in use

■ PBX BUSY TONE


Not in use

229
9. Service Mode

TESTMODE

PRINT
TESTMODE > PRINT
PG-TYPE Setting of PG number
Detail To set the PG number of the test print.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 7
0: Grid Bk
1: HT
2. Solid black
3: Solid white
4: 17 gradations
5: Thin horizontal line
6: Pascal correction chart
7: Chart128
Default Value 0

COUNT Setting of PG output quantity


Detail To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 1

PHASE Setting of PG 2-sided mode


Detail To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
Even if 2-sided print is set for a machine that only supports 1-sided print, the setting is disabled.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : 1-sided,
1 : 2-sided
Default Value 0

MODE Setting of test print image formation method


Detail To set the image formation method for the test print.
If PG-TYPE is 0/1, this setting is disabled because a specific image formation method is applied.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
0: TBIC
1: Resolution dithering
2: Gradation dithering
3: Color tone dithering
4: High-resolution dithering
Default Value 0

230
9. Service Mode

TESTMODE > PRINT


THRU Setting of image correction table at test print
Detail It is possible to check the density characteristics due to the density correction process when normal
gamma LUT is used, and the density characteristics of the engine when the linear gamma LUT is
used.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Normal gamma LUT
1 : Through (linear) gamma LUT
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Gamma LUT: Density gradation characteristic table

DENS Adjustment of test print engine F value


Detail This setting is used to adjust the F value of the engine of test print.The density increases as the
value increases.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -4 to 4
-4: Light
+4: Dark
Default Value 0

MABK Set toner thinning process at test print


Detail To execute the thinning process to alleviate the toner scattering at test print.
The thinning amount of toner increases in accordance with Mode 1 to Mode 4.
Use Case Print Test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: OFF
1: Mode1
2: Mode2
3: Mode3
Default Value 0

FEED Setting of paper source at test print


Detail To set the paper source at the time of test print output.
If this mode is set when there is no Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette), the output is made from
Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette).
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
0 : MP Tray
1 : Cassette1
2 : Cassette2
3 : Cassette3
4 : Cassette4
Default Value 1

START Output of test print


Detail To output a test print with the PG pattern set in PG-TYPE, MODE, etc.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
Default Value 0

231
9. Service Mode

FAX

MODEM
FAX model only

TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM


Item Description
RELAY-1
Title NCU relay test 1
Details N To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU.
This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch.
Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 6
0: All OFF
1: CML ON/OFF
2: P ON/OFF
3: S ON/OFF
4: H ON/OFF
5: HD ON/OFF
6: R ON/OFF
Default value 0
Related service mode TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM > RELAY-2
RELAY-2
Title NCU relay test 2
Details To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU.
This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch.
Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 7
0: All OFF
1: CIST2 ON/OFF
2: C1 ON/OFF
3: NORG ON/OFF
4: DCSEL ON/OFF
5: DCLIM ON/OFF
6: IPSEL1 ON/OFF
7: IPSEL2 ON/OFF
Default value 0
Related service mode TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM > RELAY-1
FREQ
Title To test whether the specified frequency is oscillated.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specified frequency is oscil-
lated by the tone transmission function of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Details When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 7
0: OFF
1: 462 Hz
2: 1100 Hz
3: 1300 Hz
4: 1500 Hz
5: 1650 Hz
6: 1850 Hz, 7: 2100 Hz

232
9. Service Mode

TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM


Item Description
Default value 0
G3TX
Title G3 signal transmission test
Details To test whether the specified G3 signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specific G3 signal pattern is
transmitted at the specified transmission speed by the G3 signal transmission function of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 9
0: OFF
1: 300 bps
2: 2400 bps
3: 4800 bps
4: 7200 bps
5: 9600 bps
6: TC7200 bps
7: TC9600 bps
8: 12000 bps
9: 14400 bps
Default value 0
DTMFTX
Title DTMF transmission test
Details To test whether the specified DTMF signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specified DTMF signal is
transmitted by the DTMF transmission function of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 12
0: OFF
1: 1
2: 2
3: 3
4: 4
5: 5
6: 6
7: 7
8: 8
9: 9
10: 0
11: *
12: #
Default value 0
Supplement/memo DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency): Signal method combining two specific frequencies like a push-tone
phone.
V34G3TX
Title V.34 G3 signal transmission test
Details To test whether the specified V.34 G3 signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specific G3 signal pattern is
transmitted at the specified transmission speed and modulation speed by the G3 signal transmission func-
tion (V.34) of the modem.Check this with the speaker.
A setting value other than 0 is indicated as a 3-digit integer (1st digit: modulation speed, last 2 digits:
transmission speed).
A value other than the specified numerical value is invalid.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.

233
9. Service Mode

TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM


Item Description
Display/adj/set range 0 to 614
0: OFF
• First digit (Modulation speed/baud rate)
1: 2400 baud
2: 2743 baud
3: 2800 baud
4: 3000 baud
5: 3200 baud
6: 3429 baud
• Last 2 digits (Transmission speed)
01: 2400 bps
02: 4800 bps
03: 7200 bps
04: 9600 bps
05: 12000 bps
06: 14400 bps
07: 16800 bps
08: 19200 bps
09: 21600 bps
10: 24000 bps
11: 26400 bps
12: 28800 bps
13: 31200 bps
14: 33600 bps
Default value 0

FACULTY
FAX model only

TESTMODE > FAX > FACULTY


Item Description
G34800TX
Title G3 4800 bps signal transmission test
Details To test whether the G3 signal is transmitted at 4800 bps.
By closing or opening the DC circuit, the specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted at 4800 bps by
the G3 signal transmission function.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default value 0
DETECT1
Title Ring detection
Details To check the ON/OFF state of CI, FC, and hook from the line.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default value 0
Supplement/memo CI (Calling Identification): Ring signal UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter): Con-
sole
DETECT2
Title Calling tone detection test 1

234
9. Service Mode

TESTMODE > FAX > FACULTY


Item Description
Details To check calling tone signal and FED.
Set the CML relay to ON and detect the calling tone.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default value 0
Supplement/memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control Unit) Board to
switch between the telephone and fax.
DETECT3
Title Calling tone detection test 2
Details To check calling tone signal and FED.
Set the CML relay to OFF and detect the calling tone.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/adj/set range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default value 0
Supplement/memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control Unit) Board to
switch between the telephone and fax.

235
10 Installation
Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy Card
Reader Attachment-G1..................237
Copy Control Interface Kit-C1........... 252
MiCARD Attachment Kit-A2.............. 260
10. Installation

< Copy Card Reader Attachment-G1 >


Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy
Card Reader Attachment-G1

Points to Note at Installation

NOTE:
The following options cannot be used in combination with
this equipment.
• MiCARDAttachment Kit-A2
• Copy Control Interface Kit-C1 x1 x1

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the machine when
performing work by shifting the host machine from
the working table.
• When opening/closing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit x1 x6
after disconnecting the arm, be careful not to get
your finger caught.

Checking the Contents


x1 x1
< Copy Card Reader-F1 >

1x TP;M3x6
x3
RS tight; M4x10
x1

RS tight; M4x10
x1 x1
x1

Turning OFF the power of


thehost machine
Check that the main power is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch.

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and


thelamp of the main power are turned off, and
thendisconnect the power plug.

237
10. Installation

Installation Outline Drawing 2

Installation Procedure

238
10. Installation

4 5
CAUTION: NOTE:
Shift the right side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm
• When opening/closing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit
from the working table to release the claw on the lower
after disconnecting the arm, be sure to perform the
side of the Right Cover Unit.
work while supporting the ADF Unit + Reader Unit.
• Be careful not to get your hand caught.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When removing the Right Cover Unit, be careful
not to drop the host machine as the host machine
may be shifted.

100 mm

239
10. Installation

6 7
NOTE: NOTE:
Release the claw while opening the Right Cover Unit in the Release the claw while opening the Right Cover Unit in the
direction of the arrow. direction of the arrow.

240
10. Installation

8 10
NOTE:
Release the claw while opening the Right Cover Unit in the
direction of the arrow.
RS tight; M4x10

1x

11

9
CAUTION:
Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
to prevent a fall.

241
10. Installation

12 14
NOTE: CAUTION:
Shift the right side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
from the working table to install the Right Cover Unit. to prevent a fall.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When installing the Right Cover Unit, be careful
not to drop the host machine as the host machine
may be shifted.

15
CAUTION:
100 mm
When cutting off the part, be sure not to make burrs.

13

242
10. Installation

16 17
NOTE:
Shift the left side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm
from the working table to release the claw on the lower
side of the Left Cover Unit.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When removing the Left Cover Unit, be careful not
to drop the host machine as the host machine may
be shifted.

100 mm

18

243
10. Installation

19 21

2x 4x

22

6x

20
CAUTION:
Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
to prevent a fall.

NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 24.

244
10. Installation

23 24
NOTE:
Use the screws removed in step 22.

TP; M3x6

2x
6x

1x

25

2x 4x

245
10. Installation

26 28
NOTE: CAUTION:
Shift the left side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
from the working table to install the Left Cover Unit. to prevent a fall.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When installing the Left Cover Unit, be careful not
to drop the host machine as the host machine may
be shifted.

100 mm

27

246
10. Installation

29 30

31

32

247
10. Installation

33 34
NOTE:
Be sure that the Harness Band is inside the Connector
Cover.

1x
TP; M3x6

1x

248
10. Installation

35 37
NOTE:
• When affixing the Cord Clamps, be sure to align them
with the underside of the cut-offs.
• Be sure that there is no extra slack when securing the
Card Reader Relay Harness.

6x

36

249
10. Installation

38 40
CAUTION:
• Be sure that the Harness Band is put inside the
groove of the Connector Case.
RS tight
; M4x10 • Be careful not to trap the cable.

39
CAUTION:
Do not disconnect the short connector.

1x

41
1x

250
10. Installation

42
Connect the power plug to the outlet.

43
Turn ON the main power switch.

Setting after Installation


Configure the card management information settings in
service mode.

1. COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD-NUM, and


enter the first number of the card to be used.
Enter the smallest card number to be used by the user.

2. Sequence numbers beginning with the number


specified in COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL >
CARD are automatically registered.
From the entered card number, 300 cards can be used.

3. Select ON for the Dept ID control.

NOTE:
How to enter System Manager Settings
1. Enter the Manager ID: 7654321. (Default values)
2. Enter the PIN: 7654321. (Default values)
3. Press the "ID" key.

[Menu] > [System Management Settings] > [Department


ID Management ON/OFF] > [ON]

4. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to


enable the setting values.

5. Check that a message [Insert the card.] appears.

251
10. Installation

Copy Control Interface Kit-C1 Installation Outline Drawing

Points to Note at Installation

NOTE:
It cannot be used in combination with the Copy Card
Reader-F1.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the machine when
performing work by shifting the host machine from
the working table.
• When opening/closing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit
after disconnecting the arm, be careful not to get
your finger caught.

Checking the Contents

x1 x1
Installation Procedure

1
x2 x2

x2

Turning OFF the power of


thehost machine
Check that the main power is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch.

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and


thelamp of the main power are turned off, and
thendisconnect the power plug.

252
10. Installation

2 4
CAUTION:
• When opening/closing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit
after disconnecting the arm, be sure to perform the
work while supporting the ADF Unit + Reader Unit.
• Be careful not to get your hand caught.

253
10. Installation

5 6
CAUTION: NOTE:
Shift the left side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm
When cutting off the part, be sure not to make burrs.
from the working table to release the claw on the lower
side of the Left Cover Unit.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When removing the Left Cover Unit, be careful not
to drop the host machine as the host machine may
be shifted.

100 mm

254
10. Installation

7 9

10
CAUTION:
Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
to prevent a fall.

255
10. Installation

11 13

2x 4x

12

6x

NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 15.

256
10. Installation

14 15
NOTE: NOTE:
Be sure to tighten the hexagon screws with needlenose Use the screws removed in step 12.
pliers.

6x

2x

16
1x

2x 4x

257
10. Installation

17 19
NOTE: CAUTION:
Shift the left side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
from the working table to install the Left Cover Unit. to prevent a fall.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When installing the Left Cover Unit, be careful not
to drop the host machine as the host machine may
be shifted.

100 mm

18

258
10. Installation

20 21

22

23

259
10. Installation

MiCARD Attachment Kit-A2 Checking the Contents

Points to Note at Installation

NOTE:
• Prepare a Card Reader (sales company's option) in
advance.
• It cannot be used in combination with the Copy Card
Reader-F1.

x1 x1
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the machine when
performing work by shifting the host machine from
the working table.
• When opening/closing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit
after disconnecting the arm, be careful not to get
your finger caught. x1 x1

x1 x1

1x x4

x1 x2

TP;M4x16 TP;M4x8
x1 x1

TP;M3x6
x1

260
10. Installation

Installation Procedure

1
x1 x1

Turning OFF the power of


thehost machine
Check that the main power is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch.

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and


thelamp of the main power are turned off, and 2
thendisconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing

261
10. Installation

3 4
CAUTION:
• When opening/closing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit
after disconnecting the arm, be sure to perform the
work while supporting the ADF Unit + Reader Unit.
• Be careful not to get your hand caught.

262
10. Installation

5 6
NOTE: NOTE:
Shift the right side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm Release the claw while opening the Right Cover Unit in the
from the working table to release the claw on the lower direction of the arrow.
side of the Right Cover Unit.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When removing the Right Cover Unit, be careful
not to drop the host machine as the host machine
may be shifted.

100 mm

263
10. Installation

7 8
NOTE: NOTE:
Release the claw while opening the Right Cover Unit in the Release the claw while opening the Right Cover Unit in the
direction of the arrow. direction of the arrow.

9
CAUTION:
Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
to prevent a fall.

264
10. Installation

10 12
NOTE:
Shift the right side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm
from the working table to install the Right Cover Unit.
TP; M4x8

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When installing the Right Cover Unit, be careful
not to drop the host machine as the host machine
may be shifted.

1x

100 mm

11
13

265
10. Installation

14 16
CAUTION:
Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
to prevent a fall.

17

15

TP; M4x16

1x

266
10. Installation

18 19
NOTE:
Shift the left side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm
from the working table to release the claw on the lower
side of the Left Cover Unit.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When removing the Left Cover Unit, be careful not
to drop the host machine as the host machine may
be shifted.

100 mm

20

267
10. Installation

21 23

2x 4x

24

6x

22
CAUTION:
Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
to prevent a fall.

NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 26.

268
10. Installation

25 27
CAUTION:
The numbers of pins on both ends of the connector are 2x 4x
different. Be sure to insert the correct end.

1x 1x

26
NOTE:
Use the screws removed in step 24 .

6x

269
10. Installation

28 29
CAUTION: CAUTION:
• Be sure to fit the protrusion with the groove. Be sure that the USB Grounding Plate is fitted properly.
• Be sure that the USB Grounding Plate is fitted
properly.

TP; M3x6

270
10. Installation

30 33
1x 2x

34
31
1x

32

271
10. Installation

35 37

1x

36
NOTE:
When affixing the Cord Clamps, be sure to align them with
the underside of the cut-offs.
38
CAUTION:
• Be sure to wind the cable of the IC Card Reader 3
times before securing it in place using the 2 Wire
Saddles.
• Do not put the 4th wind of the cable whose end is
to be inserted into the USB slot through the Wire
Saddle as doing so causes stress on the Wire
Saddle.

2x

4x

272
10. Installation

39 41
1x

40
CAUTION:
Be sure to adjust the cable of the IC Card Reader to
prevent any slack.

42

273
10. Installation

43 44
NOTE: CAUTION:
Shift the left side of the host machine by approx. 100 mm When installing the Left Cover Unit, be careful not to
from the working table to install the Left Cover Unit. trap the cable of the IC Card Reader.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the host machine when
shifting it.
• When installing the Left Cover Unit, be careful not
to drop the host machine as the host machine may
be shifted.

100 mm

45
CAUTION:
Shift the host machine to the center of the working table
to prevent a fall.

274
10. Installation

46 47

48

49

275
APPENDICES
Service Tools.................................... 277
General Timing Chart........................278
General Circuit Diagram....................279
Backup Data......................................280
Soft Counter Specifications...............282
Service Tools

Service Tools

Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:

Name of Tool Parts.No Use


Digital Multimeter FY9-2002 Used as a probe extension when making
electrical checks.

Solvents and Oils


The table below lists the standard tools required in service works for this product.

No. Name of Tool Use Remarks


1 Alcohol Cleaning: • Keep away from flame
Plastic • Purchase locally
Rubber
Metal part
Oil stain
Toner stain
2 Lubricant Apply to gear • HY9-0007 (MOLYCOTE
EM-50L)
3 Lubricant Apply to ADF scanning area • FY9-6020(Oil glass clean-
er)

277
General Timing Chart

General Timing Chart


Timing chart two consecutive prints on LTR paper

Power switch ON

Operation
WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LASTR STBY
1 TOP sensor (PS204)

2 Fixing delivery sensor (PS915)

3 Print start command (EEC12)

4 Laser Scanner Motor (M2)

5 Laser Diode
6 BD Output signal (BDO)

7 Main Motor (M1)

8 Primary Charging Bias (AC)

9 Primary Charging Bias (DC)

10 Developing Bias

11 Transfer Charging Bias

12 Fixing Heater (H1)

13 Cassette pickup solenoid (SL1)

14 Main Fan (FM1/ FM2)

15

16

17

18

19

20

278
General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

UNIT27 DSP1
Touch Panel LCD
J1_TTP J1_LCD
4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M3 READER ADF
Reader

LCD_DOUT
M4 SL4 PS2 PS3

+3.3V_LCD
F Motor PS1 F

LCD_CLK

LCDPWM
LCD_DIN
ADF Motor ADF Delivery Document Document

LCD_DE

LCD_CS
LDC_G7
LDC_G6
LDC_G5

LDC_G4
LDC_G3
LDC_G2
LDC_R7
LDC_R6
LDC_R5

LDC_R4
LDC_R3
LDC_R2
MT42 MT41

LDC_B7
LDC_B6
LDC_B5

LCD_B4
LCD_B3
LCD_B2

/LCDPE
HSYNC
VSYNC
M CIS HP Option Controller Sorenoid End Sensor Sensor

DCLK
panel frame

+24V
Sensor

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
1 2 3 4

N.C

N.C
M

MT1502
SL

J1302
J1312
J1301
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3

J1502
1 2
MF419x/ MF419dw 1 2 3

40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3

J1501DH1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
1 2 3

J1501D1

MT1302
J945 J944 J943 4 3 2 1

J1501
UNIT26
J2001

J942
1
3

Contact Image Sensor

FB_GND
1 2 3 4

J1310DH
5
2

HAND TEL LINE J16

J1303DH
4 40

J1310D
J1310L
SET

DF_GND

J1303D
4
1

J1303L
SP1 UNIT16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

J956
J951 1 2 4 3 2 1
J953

3
UNIT19 UNIT18 J954
Control Panel PCB
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2
OFF Hook NCU PCB Speaker 28
1 2 1 2 3 4

1
J941
PCB

1
J2000 19
2 1

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

19 /LVDS_DATA_CLK
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

20 LVDS_DATA_CLK
E E

/BOOK_OUTA
/BOOK_OUTB
/MODEM_DCD

BUZOUT

BOOK_OUTA

BOOK_OUTB
/MODEM_RST

/MODEM_CTS

LCD_CSIO_SEL

22 /LVDS_DATA_2
23 LVDS_DATA_2
MODEM_ESC

13 /LVDS_DATA_1

16 /LVDS_DATA_0
/INT_MODEM

14 LVDS_DATA_1

17 LVDS_DATA_0
/MODEM_CI1
/MODEM_CI2

11 PANEL_DOUT

G_CTHD_AF
R_CTHD_AF
B_CTHD_AF
MODEM_RX

+3.3V_SEN
MODEM_TX
+3.3V_MDM
+3.3V_MDM

27 /RST_PANEL
MUTE

25 PANEL_RXO
26 PANEL_TXO
MONI_OUT

PANEL_CLK

CIS_VREF
10 PANEL_DIN

+3.3V_CIS
/RST_FAX

4 /INT_TOUCH

10 CISMODE
8 /PANEL_CS

15 CISOUT2

13 CISOUT1

11 CISOUT0

/ADF_OUTA
/ADF_OUTB
CISCLK

ADF_OUTA

ADF_OUTB

+3.3V_SEN
/HOOK

MT1501
5 +3.3V_UI
6 +3.3V_UI

CISSP

+24V_SOL
MT1301
GND

+3.3V_DS
LEDV
HPS

14 GND

12 GND

GND
GND

GND

GND

GND
HRI

12 GND

15 GND

18 GND

21 GND

24 GND

28 GND
2 +24V
1 N.C

3 N.C

GND

GND
DES
SIG

DS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

9
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 J932 15
J931 28 J927 J926
J928 USB
J930
J925 UNIT14 PORT
J910
Main Controller PCB
J908
ETHERNET J911
13 PORT
J918 J923 J903 J909 J933 J934 J902
J901 J915 J904 J905 J914
D 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4
J906
3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 D
30 1 3 5 7 9 11 13

CCVI_LARGE_SMALL_L
FAN_DETECT

FRAM_WP
UH_HDM1

UH_HDM1

ECO_DAT
UH_HDP1

UH_HDP1

ECO_CLK
10
11
12
13

SPD_DAT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+VDD_EMMC

SPD_CLK
SDO_DATA0
SDO_DATA1
SDO_DATA2
SDO_DATA3

SDO_DATA4
SDO_DATA5
SDO_DATA6
SDO_DATA7

/RST_EMMC
MP SL

+5V_HS

+5V_HS
SBD7/SDIO_DATA3
SBD6/SDIO_DATA2
SBD5/SDIO_DATA1
SBD4/SDIO_DATA0
SDO_CMD
24P1

CCVI_KYU_COUNT
SDO_CLK

+3.3V

+3.3V
FAN_ON

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND

GND

GND

CCVI_CL_BW_L
CCVI_CP_ENB
CARD_COUNT
+3.3V

+3.3V

CCVI_OPTION
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

SDIO_CMD
SDIO_CLK
TAG

+3.3V_WL

+3.3V_WL

CARD_RX
CARD_TX
SW2 Cartridge
5 4
J972
3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
P972_1
Door Switch Sensor 3 2 1
J1501D

GND

GND

GND

GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

GND

GND
J1501DH
UNIT23

/PD

+5V

+5V
1 2 1 2 3
J1501L J1_MMC UNIT21 USB-HOST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6

UNIT15 USB PCB J1 J1


PCB
FT2

FT1

J2100 UNIT24

13
10
11
12
eMMC PCB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
USB USB UNIT25
1 2 Port Port Serial Number 1 2 3 4 5
123
PCB Memory PCB

GND(DCOM)

GND(DCOM)

GND(DCOM)
J28
1 2
J971 J971 Copy Control
SL
to Interface Kit-C1

GND(5)(*)
13
FM3 SL3 Copy Card
C C

/VDO1

/VDO2

/BDI(*)
+SV(*)
GND
GND

VDO1

VDO2
J1_WLAN
Reader-F1

CNT0
CNT1
CNT2
24V
24V

Controller Fan MP Tray


+24V_S

Pickup UNIT22
TAG1
TAG2
+24U

Sorenoid Wireless LAN PCB


30 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
1 2 3 4 1 2
12 10 8 6 4 2
J201 J255 J214
FANLOCK J801

1
J261 J260 7
DUPSOL
UNIT2
J251

J252

2
6
J264 J265 CSTSOL +24P1
M2 UNIT6

3
5

4
4
Engine Controller PCB J262 J263
J207 GND J1102 /ACC

4
4

M
Laser

3
3
J259
/DEC /DEC Laser

5
J258 3

2
2
J271 J270 /ACC GND Scanner Driver

6
2
Only for EUR Other than EUR

1
1
+24P1
12 8 Motor PCB

7
1 J1103 J802
J915M J209 J211 J208 J205 J204 J203 J213 J202 J850 J206 J210 J212
3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 2 1

JP_LEAD

JP_LEAD
1 2 3
AC-H

AC-N

FSRTH
/POSNS
FANLOCK
/FULLSNS

/MACC
/MDEC

GND
/DUPSNS

+24P1
/CSTSNS

GND

ACH
ACN
SL1

+3.3V
/WDSNS
AC-N
AC-H

/MPSNS

GND

MFG

J1104
+24V_S
/TESTP

/PISNS

+24P1
Cassette
+3.3A

+3.3A

+3.3A

+3.3A

+3.3A

UNIT3 +24P1

1
GND
/CLK

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

SL
UNIT5
/SO
Main Switch
Main Switch

CSTSOL Pickup

2
B B
/SI

High Voltage

2
1 P-GND 1
SW11

J1202FA

Thermoswitch
Connecting Sorenoid
SW1

MT1
2 2 Power Supply

Thermistor
1
3

5 4 3 2 1 +24U
1
3

PCB
2

1
3 3
J804D +3.3AA
PCB SL2

1
TH1
3 2 1 J1101

TP1
1

5 4 3 2 1
J9053M

4 4

TP
J9051M

J804DH TRPWM
2

+24P1 Duplex
2

1
1 2 3 5 5 TR

1
TRCRNT

SL
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J804L
J10

2
1

JP301 DUPSOL
Reverse

2
MT2
6 6

2
1

2
TRPFOT
J1205
2

JP302
7 7
Sorenoid
2
AC-H

AC-N

TRNFOT

J256
3

1
8 8
Option

8
3

GND
3 2 1 J905M

2
3 2 1 drawer 123
J407 J805L
J905F
FM1
3
1 2 +24P1
PS201 PS202 PS203 PS204 PS205 PS206 M1

3
1 2
connecter

1
FM2

321
GND

J257
Main Fan UNIT4

2
12

2
MT16

1 +24P1 1
Duplex MP Tray Cassette Top Media FD Tray Media Main Motor FANLOCK
Main Fan

1
PS915

3
2 2
Reverse Media Media Sensor Width Full Sensor Only for EUR 3
+5R
PRDCPWM 3
Low Voltage J1105
Sensor Presence Presence Sensor Fixing Delivery Power Supply J805D
UNIT11 Sensor 1 2 4 PRACC 4 J805DH Other than EUR
UNIT7 Sensor Sensor 5 PRACPWM 5 PCB
MT15

UNIT10 UNIT12
UNIT8 UNIT9 Top Sensor Unit H1 6
7
DVDCPWM
CRGSNS
6
7
DV
JP303

UNIT1 Fixing Assembly Heater 8 GND 8


JP304
PR
9 GND 9
1
2
3

JP305
10 P-GND 10 JP306
A J1
11 +24U
12 DVACC
11
12
ANT
JP111
A
INLET JP112

J250

FT3

279
Backup Data

Backup Data

Data Location Replace Delete Backup by User Backup by Service


Menu > System Management Settings COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Engine Con- Main Con- Initialize All Initializing Initializing Initializing System R-CON *2 SRVC-DAT COUNTER HIST *4 ALL *5 ERDS-DAT Yes/No Method Location to Yes/No Method Location to
troller PCB troller PCB Data / Set- Key and Cer- Address Menu > Initi- Manage- *3 be stored be stored
tings tificate Book alize All ment Set-
tings
Address Main Con- - Clear - - Clear - - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
Book troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Settings Manu
Paper Set- Main Con- - Clear Clear - - - - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
tings troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Network Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
Settings troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Preferences Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Timer Set- Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
tings troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Common Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
Settings troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Copy Set- Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
tings troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Fax Settings Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear - - - - - Clear - Yes *6 Remote UI PC, USB No - -
troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Scan Set- Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear - - - - - Clear - Yes *7 Remote UI PC, USB No - -
tings troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Memory Me- Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
dia Print Set- troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
tings
Printer Set- Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
tings troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
Adjustment / Main Con- - Clear Clear - - - - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote UI PC, USB No - -
Mainte- troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
nance
System Main Con- - Clear Clear - - Clear Clear - - - - Clear *12 - Yes *13 Remote UI PC, USB No - -
Manage- troller PCB *9 LUI *10 memory
ment Set-
tings
Key and Main Con- - Clear Clear Clear *11 - - - - - Clear - No - - No - -
Certificate troller PCB
eRDS Main Con- - Clear Clear - - - - - - - - Clear Clear No - - No - -
troller PCB
Serial Num- EE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
ber PROM(PCB
Unit) / On-
Board-
Fram /
Fram(PCBU
nit)
Job History Main Con- - Clear Clear - - - - - - - Clear Clear - No - - No - -
troller PCB
Page coun- Main Con- - - - - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
ter troller PCB /
OnBoard-
Fram /
Fram(PCB
Unit)
Part counter None - Clear - - - - - - - Clear - - - No - - No - -
Service mode

280
Backup Data

Data Location Replace Delete Backup by User Backup by Service


Menu > System Management Settings COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
Engine Con- Main Con- Initialize All Initializing Initializing Initializing System R-CON *2 SRVC-DAT COUNTER HIST *4 ALL *5 ERDS-DAT Yes/No Method Location to Yes/No Method Location to
troller PCB troller PCB Data / Set- Key and Cer- Address Menu > Initi- Manage- *3 be stored be stored
tings tificate Book alize All ment Set-
tings
Service Main Con- - Clear - - - - - Clear - - - - - No - - No - -
mode setting troller PCB
values
(Reader)
Service Main Con- - Clear - - - - - - Clear - - Clear - No Remote UI PC, USB Yes Service PC, USB
mode setting troller PCB *9 memory mode *8 memory
values(Main
Controller)
Service Main Con- - Clear - - - - - - - - - - - No Remote UI PC, USB Yes Service PC, USB
mode setting troller PCB *9 memory mode *8 memory
values (En-
gine Control-
ler)

*1 Log data such as Mac address, USB serial number, printer-related setting values, scanner-related setting values, user data, and logs are initialized.
*2. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are initialized.
*3. Service data is cleared. User data is not cleared. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*4. The logs (communication management, print, jam, error, and alarm) are cleared.
*5. The user data, service data, logs, and system administrator are initialized. (The system manager ID and password are changed back to the default values.) The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*6. Excluding Fax Setup Guide
*7. Excluding the shortcut key
*8. FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT / FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
*9. Settings/Registration > Import/Export
*10. Setting Menu List > System Management Settings > Import/Export of Settings.
*11. When the key and certificate are initialized, TLS authentication of IEEE802.1X and the SSL setting are changed to "OFF".
*12. The system administrator ID and the password are changed back to the default values. ID: 7654321 / PWD: 7654321.
*13. Excluding [Forwarding Settings], [Remote UI On/Off], [Update Firmware], [Initialize Key and Certificate], [Initialize Address Book], and [Initialize System Management Settings]

281
Soft Counter Specifications

Soft Counter Specifications


The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


000 to 099 Toner Bottle 500 to 599 Scan
100 to 199 Total 600 to 699 Memory Media Print
200 to 299 Copy 700 to 799 Receive Print
300 to 399 Print 800 to 899 Report Print
400 to 499 Copy + Print 900 to 999 Transmission

Meanings of symbols in tables


• Numbers 1, 2 indicated under "Counter Details": Number of counts for large size paper
• Copy: Local copy
• Copy A: Local copy
• Print: PDL print + report print
• Print A: PDL print + report print
• Scan: Black and white scan + color scan
*This product does not have the function of "Remote Copy" and "Box Print".

000 to 099

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


071 Toner Bottle (Black)

100 to 199

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


101 Total 1 138 Total A1 (2-Sided)
102 Total 2 139 Total A2 (2-Sided)
104 Total (Small) 141 Small A (2-Sided)
108 Total (Black1) 150 Total B1
109 Total (Black2) 151 Total B2
113 Total (Black / Small) 153 Total B (Small)
114 Total 1 (2-Sided) 156 Total B (Black1)
115 Total 2 (2-Sided) 157 Total B (Black2)
117 Small (2-Sided) 161 Total B (Black / Small)
126 Total A1 162 Total B1 (2-Sided)
127 Total A2 163 Total B2 (2-Sided)
129 Total A (Small) 165 Small B (2-Sided)
132 Total A (Black1) 181 Toner (Black)
133 Total A (Black2) 194 Toner replacement / Black *1
137 Total A (Black / Small)

200 to 299

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


201 Copy (Total 1 ) 228 Copy (Black / Small)
202 Copy (Total 2) 238 Copy (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
204 Copy (Small) 249 Copy A (Black1)
205 Copy A (Total 1 ) 250 Copy A (Black2)
206 Copy A (Total 2) 256 Copy A (Black / Small)
208 Copy A (Small) 266 Copy A (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
209 Local Copy (Total 1 ) 277 Local Copy (Black1)
210 Local Copy (Total 2) 278 Local Copy (Black2)
212 Local Copy (Small) 284 Local Copy (Black / Small)
221 Copy (Black1) 294 Local Copy (Black / Small / 2-Sided)

282
Soft Counter Specifications

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


222 Copy (Black2)

300 to 399

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


301 Print (Total 1 ) 330 Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
302 Print (Total 2) 331 PDL Print (Total 1 )
304 Print (Small) 332 PDL Print (Total 2)
305 Print A (Total 1 ) 334 PDL Print (Small)
306 Print A (Total 2) 339 PDL Print (Black1)
308 Print A (Small) 340 PDL Print (Black2)
313 Print (Black1) 346 PDL Print (Black / Small)
314 Print (Black2) 356 PDL Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
320 Print (Black / Small)

400 to 499

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


404 Copy + Print (Black / Small) 413 Copy + Print (2)
405 Copy + Print (Black2) 414 Copy + Print (1)
406 Copy + Print (Black1) 422 Copy + Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
412 Copy + Print (Small)

500 to 599

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


501 Scan (Total 1 ) 509 Color Scan (Total 1 )
505 Black Scan (Total 1 ) 510 Color Scan (Total 2)
506 Black Scan (Total 2) 512 Color Scan (Small)
508 Black Scan (Small)

600 to 699

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


631 Memory Media Print (Total 1 ) 640 Memory Media Print (Black2)
632 Memory Media Print (Total 2) 646 Memory Media Print (Black / Small)
634 Memory Media Print (Small) 656 Memory Media Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
639 Memory Media Print (Black1)

700 to 799

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


701 Receive Print (Total 1 ) 710 Receive Print (Black2)
702 Receive Print (Total 2) 716 Receive Print (Black / Small)
704 Receive Print (Small) 726 Receive Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
709 Receive Print (Black1)

800 to 899

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


801 Report Print (Total 1 ) 809 Report Print (Black1)
802 Report Print (Total 2) 810 Report Print (Black2)
804 Report Print (Small) 816 Report Print (Black / Small)

283
Soft Counter Specifications

900 to 999

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details


921 TX Scan Total5 (Color) 945 TX Scan / E-Mail (Color)
922 TX Scan Total5 (Black) 946 TX Scan / E-Mail (Black)
939 Remote Scan (Color) 959 Memory Media Scan (Color)
940 Remote Scan (Black) 960 Memory Media Scan (Black)

The counter can be displayed in COPIER > OPTION > USER > TNRB-SW.
Settings of Counter 2 to 6 which are service mode items are not supported.

284

You might also like